Dictionary of Organon

THE DICTIONARY
OF ORGANON
PARTS (COMBINED)—I, II & III
R. R. JOARDAR
D.M.S., M.B.S.(H)
Dip. Mittelstufe II (Munich),
Ex-Senior Professor, Head of the Department,
Organon & Homoeophilosophy,
Mahesh Bhattacharyya Homoeo Medical College & Hospital (Govt. of West Bengal)
AUTHOR, “TRANSLATION OF ALL THE
NON-ENGLISH TEXTS IN ORGANON” ETC.
THE DICTIONARY OF HOMOEOPATHY
A SHORT HISTORY OF HOMOEOPATHY
B. Jain Publishers (P) Ltd.

USA — Europe — India
THE DICTIONARY OF ORGANON
First Edition: 2016
1st Impression: 2016
All rights reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system or transmitted, in any form
or by any means, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without any prior written permission of the
publisher.
© with the Author
Published by Kuldeep Jain for

B. Jain Publishers (P) Ltd.
D-157, Sector-63, NOIDA-201307, U.P. (India)
Tel.: +91-120-4933333 • Email: info@bjain.com
Website: www.bjain.com
Registered office: 1921/10, Chuna Mandi, Pahargani,
New Delhi-110 055 (India)
Printed in India
ISBN: 978-81-319-3797-6
DEDICATED TO THE SACRED MEMORIES
of
Rasbehari Joardar
&
Brajarangini Joardar
R. R. J.
Foreword
Dr. R. R. Joardar has very simply put a benchmark for

Homoeopaths, not only in West Bengal, not only in India, but
the world at large. A simple man who is not stunted by age but
stands tall in the world that has had exemplary stalwarts. His
qualifications as a brilliant student who passed D.M.S. with
Honours and a rank holder of West Bengal Homoeopathy Council
do not define him, but his complete and incomprehensible
devotion to the “mission” does. A man who in pursuit of his
Master, acquired a Diploma Mittelstufe II from Munich, learnt
the language in which Hahnemann spoke and wrote, translated
them for students and teachers on return and held the lamp in
the days of hopelessness to show the way forward.
Donned the position of the Head of Dept. Organon of
Medicine at Mahesh Bhattacharya Homoeopathic Medical
College and Hospital, Calcutta University and authored books to
ensure that we would be the people to carry forward the Master’s
vision using Organon as the Northern lights to show direction
whenever we felt lost. Even after retirement and failing health in
his nineties, he comes once in a while to give lectures which are
pearls of wisdom to almost all colleges in West Bengal for both
Undergraduate and Postgraduate colleges like NIH, Mahesh
Bhattacharya College, D.N. De to name a few and that day, the
attendance is 100% such is the man, such is his devotion. Macular
degeneration is eroding his vision, but that does not daunt his
soul—he still buys the latest editions of all books on Internal
Medicine like Davidson and Harrison and asks his students to
read them out aloud, when questioned about this phenomenon
with a twinkle in his eyes, he smiles and replies,“I have to keep a
THE DICTIONARY OF ORGANON / v
watch on the diseases and also to observe the progress of syphilis,

gonorrhoea, etc. for being a good homoeopath with a sound
knowledge of Organon”.
The book that we have compiled with a lot of pride and
humility is one of the most authoritative and truly the best so
far the Hahnemannian principle in its best ever format. This will
also have a holistic approach with contribution of Dr. Samuel
Hahnemann, Ayurveda, and thoughts of Pythagoras, Hippocrates,
Empiricists, and others.
This book is every student and teacher’s ready reckoner; “The
Dictionary of Organon of Medicine”. If this book is not there in
your bookshelf consider it incomplete a collection. The originality
of this masterpiece is undeniable undoubtedly and truly as a
mediator to have the culmination in it being published pan India,
I feel humbled and truly privileged to have had the collaboration
of Dr. Joardar’s “beautiful yet organized, masterpiece yet subdued,
authoritative yet a homage” piece of unyielding devotion with B.
Jain Publishers, New Delhi to see the light of the day.
The whole fraternity of Homoeopaths stand obliged to both
in equal measure as we reach a milestone in putting our mission
and our role as physicians, teachers, students, and all lovers of
the true art of healing; Homoeopathy, being uplifted to scale
newer heights.
One amongst his admirers and his contemporaries, Dr.
Mahendra Singh often said that it was impossible to find another
homoeopath who had such sound knowledge of The Organon
of Medicine. Dr. L.M. Khan, Dr. Subhas Singh, Dr. Subhashish
Ganguly, and myself along with many junior and senior faculties
feel blessed to have found him as our guide and are proud to carry
vi / THE DICTIONARY OF ORGANON
forward his vision. My sincere gratitude to Dr. Joardar to have

allowed this gem to be published and to B. Jain Publishers, New
Delhi to have come forward to publish this one of the purest
books in Hahnemannian principles to enrich the repertoire of
Homoeopathic literature.
Study this book at your Undergraduate level to understand
the thoughts of the great visionary, absorb this book at your Post
Graduate level to make a mark and finally read it thereafter to
live and love homoeopathy forever.
As a student and as a teacher, he has dwarfed many and may
the writing of this living legend pass on to you. This is not only
a book, but a part of his life and a mantle that he will pass on.
We are blessed indeed to have seen him, attended his lectures,
collected a bit of his wisdom and inherited his legacy. This book
will kindle the fire of hope that all homeopaths need to sustain
the Master’s path. If one could personalize Aude Sapere; I would
say it is Dr. Rakhal Raj Joardar! I pray for his wellbeing and I
hope we remain blessed forever.
Dr Rajat Chattopadhyay
PhD Scholar(WBUHS)
Member, Education Committee,
Central Council of Homoeopathy
THE DICTIONARY OF ORGANON / vii
Preface
This book, the first and second part together, completes a

work of long thirty six years, entailing the following qualities.
The translation of all non-english texts, even of the Prefaces, and
the Introduction has been supplied also with short clarification,
wherever it was deemed necessary;
Other topics—from beginning to end—have been presented
in reference to each one’s context; all the cross references have been
supplied, as far as possible; all the related and relevant data on most
of the topics have been collected from as many sources as are available
here and to-day, and presented; and, the whole book having been
compared and verified with the original German text, the anomalies
and misunderstanding, have been rectified as much as possible.
The book contains also the transliteration of the greek texts —to
be seen for the first time ever. There are other novelties too. But the
book itself should speak, about these.
The author remains grateful to all the Authors and Authorities
on Hahnemann, Homoeopathy, and Organon, from whom he
has drawn rather liberally; acknowledges thereby their individual
contributions to homoeopathy, as also expresses his gratitude to
their respective publishers.
The author also expresses his gratitude to each one of those
Students, Teachers and Other personalities, who have contributed
more or less for the publication of the book, directly or indirectly.
It may well be that the book contains some errors. The author
would, therefore, gratefully acknowledge and, appreciate any
suggestion from any body for the improvement of the book.
10.4.79 R.R.J.
viii / THE DICTIONARY OF ORGANON
Preface To The 3rd Edition
By God’s grace and your blessings the 3rd edition is handed

over to you. 3 new topics have been added.
Please read. Filix Mas instead of Cina against Male Fern Root.
Please bear with the humble author, who is almost blind if there
be some defects here and there.
I would like to acknowledge the efforts and support of Dr
Kumar Kishore Chakraborty, Dr Shuruti Panday, Dr Samar De,
Dr A K Nandi, Dr Nirmalendu Dolui, Dr Rajat Chattopadhyay in
the completion of this work.
Thank you,
29.10.02 R. R. Joardar
THE DICTIONARY OF ORGANON / ix
Publisher’s Note
Yet another project on Organon, was the question raised

when this book came for consideration. It was only after review
and thorough study of the manuscript that we realized its unique
features which was the deep explanation of various important
terms used by Dr Hahnemann in the Organon of Medicine. The
book well elucidates all the principal words and terminologies
used in the Organon of Medicine including the ones in preface
and introduction.
Dr R.R. Joardar has brought forth an original reference book
for students from a dedication of thirty six years to a ‘beautiful
yet organised, masterpiece yet subdued’ piece of work. It will
help to disperse confusion regarding various terminologies used
by our master in his book.
Another important feature of the book is the explanation of
the Greek terminologies which have been used by Dr Hahnemann
with short clarification at necessary places. This distinguishes Dr
Joardar’s work from other available literature on the subject.
We present this work of Dr Joardar to the homoeopathic
fraternity on the eve of B. Jain completing fifty glorious years of
serving Homoeopathy especially targeting the Homoeopathic
undergraduate and Post-graduate students.
A homoeopath’s desk without this book is incomplete. Dr
Rajat Chatterrjee has beautifully explained the utility of this
work ‘Study this book at your Undergraduate level to understand the
thoughts of the great visionary, absorb this book at your Post Graduate
level to make a mark and finally read it thereafter to live and love
homoeopathy forever.’
Kuldeep Jain
CEO, B. Jain Publishers (P) Ltd.
x / THE DICTIONARY OF ORGANON
contents
Foreword .................................................................................iv
Preface....................................................................................vii
Preface to the 3rd edition........................................................ viii
Publisher’s note.........................................................................ix
1. The Title Page................................................................ 1
2. The Prefaces................................................................. 12
3. The Introduction......................................................... 20
4. The Essence of Introduction......................................... 43
5. The Dictionary of Organon......................................... 47
6. Transformation of Hahnemann’s ideas........................ 202
7. Preface........................................................................ 206
8. Basis........................................................................... 208
Index ................................................................................... 315
THE TITLE PAGE
Aude Sapere: (L) “Dare to know” —P. Schmidt

“Have the courage of your own
convictions; dare to be wise.”
—R. Haehl
Although acquainted with it from his school days, this
quotation of Horace was used by him for the first time
in the ‘Medicine of Experience’ (1805). It pleased him so
well that he adopted it in the “Organon” as motto
Used in imperative case (mood); and used from the second
edition onwards, till the sixth edition. Any new idea is
opposed by the traditional ones. Any revelation of truth
is liable to be suppressed by the conditioned thinking.
Hahnemann was aware of the dangers of knowing the
truth and holding on to it.
Hahnemann, therefore, wanted us, the physicians, to be
brave, to be courageous. Since every seeker of truth, every
one willing to know more, to be wise, as every physician
is supposed to be has to undergo all sorts of hardship. He
may have to pay dearly, even life. Such has been the lesson
of history, Socrates, Galileo, Servetus, Vesalius, Schleich,
Galen, Paracelsus, Ambroise pare, Harvey, Jenner,
Semmelweis etc. are only a few names from many, whose
lives would teach us the need of it. (Even Hahnemann’s
life is no exception.)
“This history, however, teaches us yet another courage,
namely to submit with resignation to the inevitable fate,
2 / THE DICTIONARY OF ORGANON
that truth must first suffer crucifixion, before it can stand

forth victor, a courage which under the weight of such
vexations does not falter but grows in strength.”
—Von Grauvogl
On the title page of the first edition was a stanza of Gellert
which, rendered into english, reads as follows:
“Truth for which all the eager world is fain Which makes
us happy, lies for ever more Not buried deep but lightly
covered O’er, By the wise Hand that destined it for men.”
R. E. Dudgeon’s rendering is smaller and popular!
“The truth we mortals need,
Us blest to make and keep
The Alwise slightly covered o’er,
But didn’t bury deep.”
Organon (GK)—“An instrument for effecting in best manner a
certain end.” —R. Hughes
The same form, phonetically, is used also in Persian and
Arabic Languages. Aristotle (384-312 B.C.), The Greek’s
“Various treatises on logic were summed up under the
common title ‘Organon’.
Further, Lord Bacon (1561-1626 A.D.), wrote a book
on logic, in Latin, named “Novum-Organum” (New
Organon), which is the second part of his ‘Instauratio
Magna’. These two must have influenced Hahnemann to
name his book as organon. ‘Logic the art of reasoning is
the instrument of research and discovery, which should
be a medical logic, and instrument, which the physician
THE DICTIONARY OF ORGANON / 3
should use for the discovery of the best remedies for

diseases.” —R. Hughes
Organon of medicine—It is “A text book of the principles of
Homoeopathy”written by S. Hahnemann. The actual
name of the book, written in German Language, is
“Organon der Heilkunst,” that is, the ‘Organon of the
Healing Art” or the “Organon of the Art of Healing”
(The Name)—This name, shortened only for convenience by his
followers, has been kept from Second Edition onto the
sixth edition, the last. The name of the first edition was
Organon der rationellen Heilkunde. That is ‘Organon of
the rational Healing Science (System).’ For two reasons
Hahnemann left ‘rational’ and ‘science’ out, from the
second edition onwards:
(i) Every physician thought his theory and practice to
be rational * and
(ii) Every possessor of science failed to show the art, to
cure. **
Hahnemann wanted the physicians to be rather ideal
artists (successful in practice) than be such scientists
(perfect theoreticians) who fail to deliver the goods, to
cure.
He says, in the Introduction (3rd paragraph), “I shall
occupy myself here with the practical part of medicine
only, with the healing art itself.”
* Please see the Second line of section 54

** “He was seeking not the consistency of a theory, but the success of
art.” —R. Hughes
(The book)—The organon of medicine. Hahnemann’s magnum

opus (Big work) “is his exposition and vindication of his
therapeutic method.” The book is mainly divided into
two parts, the Introduction and the Text. The text too is
divided into two parts, the theoretical, from sec. 1 to sec
70 and the practical, from sec. 71 to sec. 291 (6th Ed.). In
the theoretical part we get “a full discussion of the theory
of his method and demonstration of its philosophical
and scientific soundness” and in the practical part we get
“minute rules for the examination of his patients, for the
proving of drugs and for the selection of the remedies
upon the homoeopathic principle.” —R. Hughes
(Evolution)—“in the growth of a new system of medicine it was
inevitable that there should be considerable alteration and
improvements effected in the course of 48 years, the time
occupied by Hahnemann in the elaboration of his novel
doctrine and practice. The Essay on a New Principle, in
which, he propounded the homoeopathic therapeutic rule,
as yet believed by him to be of only partial application,
viz to some chronic diseases, was published in 1796 Nine
years after this viz in 1805, in the Medicine of Experience,
he enunciated the rule with no such limitations of its
applicability. This essay contains much of what we find in
the first and later editions of the Organon. The first edition
of this latter work appeared in 1810. The second edition,
different very considerably from the first was published in
1819. The third edition which hardly differed at all from
the previous one, appeared in 1824. The fourth edition,
which offers some important variations from the text
of its immediate predecessor (chiefly determined by the
new theory of chronic diseases), bears the date of 1829.

The fifth and last (but one) edition, published in 1833,
contains several novelties such as the theories of the Vital
force and the dynamisation of medicine. The directions
as to the repetition of the doses are also different from
those in previous editions. These two last named points
are still further modified in Hahnemann’s later work on
chronic diseases (1838).” —R.E. Dudgeon
“Wholly new is the footnote to para 282 and of greatest
importance. Here his treatment of the chronic diseases
under Psora, Syphilis and Sycoses departs absolutely
from that advised in former editions, he now advises to
commence treatment with large doses of their specific
remedies early and, if necessary, several times daily and
gradually ascend to higher degrees of dynamisation. In the
treatment of fig warts the local application is considered
necessary with the internal use of the remedy
“in Paras 22 and 29 will be found his last view on the life
principle, which term he uses throughout preferably to
vital force as in former editions.” —W. Boericke
Samuel Hahnemann—Christian Friedrich Samuel Hahnemann
was born on 10th April, 1755, just before midnight in
Meissen, Saxony, Germany. His father, a reputed painter
to a porcelain factory by the town, wanted his son to
follow his footsteps. But the son wanted to study instead.
Hahnemann studied through the night with a clay lamp
made by himself, instead of household candlesticks. This
he did to avoid his father’s displeasure.
His intelligence and integrity attracted the attention of

the headmaster of the school, and he got all the facilities
available to continue his studies. His proficiency in Latin,
Grammar and Greek language, even at the early age of
12, enabled him to teach his fellow students the above
subjects. It helped him and pleased his father, who was
unhappy since his son was not earning money.
At the age of 20 (1775) he came out of the St. Afra’s
School and left for Leipsic for higher studies in medicine,
He took his father’s advice to heart, ‘Prove all things, hold
fast that which is good.’
He supported himself by teaching French and German
and by translating books from English; for he had become,
in between, a master of about a dozen languages. From
Leipsic he went to Vienna to witness the practice of
medicine in the hospitals. He went to Herrmannstadt
accepting the Family-physician cum librarianship of
the Governor of Transylvania. After 2 years he went to
Erlangen to complete his studies and to graduate in 1779.
Soon after getting his M.D. he went back to Hettstadt,
Saxony, to practice, only to move soon to Dessau in
1783. He went to Gommern as the District physician
and married his first wife Leopoldine Henriette. He had
to leave for Dresden after 3 years to accept the post of
physician to the hospital for a year.
In the meantime he became disgusted with the uncertainty
of medical practice and devoted himself to the study of
Chemistry and other allied subjects.
In 1789 he removed to Leipsic, For 3 years he could

remain here. Here it is that in 1790 he was translating.
Wm, Cullen’s materia medica. Struck by the comment
of the author that peruvian bark cured agues because it
contained bitters etc. he, to verify, deliberately took 4
drams of its extract, twice daily for a few days. He observed
that the results produced were very similar to not only
the general symptoms but also to characteristic symptoms
of the ague. This necessitated further experiments on
others, for verification and thereafter proving with other
medicinal substances. This incident changed his life
completely and showed him the very purpose of his life.
He took the charge of an Asylum for the Insane in
Georgenthal in 1792. He was the first who pleaded for and
practised the moral (mild instead of coersive) treatment of
the insane. He then visited many places—Walschleben.
Pyrmont, Brunswick, Wolfenbuttel and Koenigslutter.
The hostility of the apothecaries and physicians of
Koenigslutter drove him from the town. Needless to
say that his comments, severe criticisms and scathing
remarks on the practices of venesections, blood letting
in other ways and massive doses of many drugs in single
prescriptions etc. had created the displeasure and hatred
of the apothecaries and the physicians towards him.
On the way to Hamburg his big carriage overturned. His
infant son died and a leg of one of his daughters fractured
due to the accident. In a village nearby he was forced to
live for 6 weeks, after which he reached Hamburg. He
was drawn to his fatherland again after short sojourns in
Altona, Mollen and Lauenburg. He wanted to settle in
Eulenburg, but the persecution of the Superintendant

physician of the place drove him from the place. He
wandered through Machern, Dessau and then to Torgau.
In the meantime he had already published quite a few
articles, booklets and books, enough to establish him as a
great reformer in medicine. These were-A new principle of
ascertaining the curative powers of medicines, Aesculapius
in the Balance, Medicine of experience, Fragmenta de
viribus and Organon of medicine, 1st Edition etc. He
re-entered Leipzig in 1810. He published his Materia
Medica Pura in 1811. Then willing to give lectures in
the medical college he had to defend a thesis before
the Faculty of medicine according to the custom. The
thesis De Helleborismo Veterum in Latin overwhelmed
the faculty members and he was allowed to lecture and
to practice. His lectures, most scholarly and brilliant,
attracted many towards him. From these he chose a few
to assist him in proving medicines. This was carried on
without intermission till 1821, when he was again driven
out of this city by the apothecaries assisted by his jealous
professional brothers.
He got an asylum in the small town of Koethen under
the patronage of the prince Anhalt Koethen and moved
to it, although with a heavy heart because the most active,
constructive and fruitful years of his life almost came to
an end.
Koethen got, therefore, the privilege of publishing his
Chronic diseases in 1828, also the 3rd 4th and 5th
editions of Organon. In 1829, a large number of admirers
assembled to celebrate his 50th Anniversary of his getting
the M.D. degree. On the same day (10.8.1829) he

founded the first Homoeopathic Society.
And the first Homoeopathic Hospital was established in
1833 at Leipsic.
He had lost his wife in 1830. In 1835, he left Koethen
for Paris, marrying his second wife Melanie de Hervelle.
Here he got not only the authorisation to practice but all
the freedom, recognition, honour and fame, his fatherland
had denied him all along. His fame, now spread all over
the world attracted hundreds of patient daily, to whom
he attended till almost his last day. He died on 2nd July.
1843 at the age of 89, ‘full of years and of honour’.
Here apart from publishing 2nd Edition of the Chronic
Diseases, he prepared his sixth Edition of Organon too,
his last word, so far as his Organon’ was concerned’
Hahnemann’s main writings
1. The school leaving essay was written in 1775 in Latin.
It was on “The wonderful structure of the human
hand.”
2. His thesis for his MD was written in Latin at
Erlangen. It was A consideration of the Aetiology
and Therapeutics of spasmodic affections
3. Treatment of chronic ulcers was written at Gommern
in 1782.
4. A treatise on forensic detection of poisoning by
Arsenic was written in 1786 at Dresden.
5. The treatise on syphilis was written in 1788 at
Locowitz and published the year after from Leipsic.
6. An account of the case of Insanity (of Klockenbring)

appeared in 1792 at Georgenthal.
7. Friend of Health appeared in 1792 and 1795 from
Valschleben and Koenigslutter.
8. Pharmaceutical Lexicon too appeared in the same
year and from the same places.
9. Essay on a new principle for ascertaining the curative
powers of drugs appeared in 1796 at Koenigslutter.
10. Are the obstacles to the attainment of simplicity
and certainty in practical medicine insurmountable?
appeared in 1792 from Koenigslutter.
11. Essay on the Treatment of fevers and periodical
diseases was published in 1798 from the same place.
12. Essay on the Antidotes appeared in 1799.
13. Effects of Coffee appeared in 1803 from Dessau.
14. Aesculapius in the balance, 1805 from Torgau.
15. Medicine of Experience 1805 from Torgau.
16. Materia medica of A. von Haller was translated in
1806.
17. Fragmenta de viribus medica mentorum positives
Sive in sano corpore humano observatis was written
in Latin and published in 1806. It contained provings
of 27 medicinal substances, also from Torgau.
18. On the value of speculative systems appeared in 1808
again from Torgau.
19. Observations on the 3 Current systems of medicine
came out in 1809 from the same place.
20. Organon of the rational healing science appeared in

1810 also from Torgau.
21. Reine Arzneimittellehre (materia medica pura) 1st
part came out in 1811 at Leipsic. It continued to be
published till 1821.
22. The treatment of Typhus fever appeared in 1814.
24. The thesis De Helleborismo Veterum was defended
in 1812.
25. The spirit of Homoeopathic Doctrine came out in
1812.
26. How so small doses of such very attenuated medicines
still possess great power appeared in 1829 at Koethen.
27. Chronische Krankheiten (Chronic Diseases) began
to be published in 1828 (till 1838) from Koethen
(and Paris).
28. Alloeopathy, a warning to all sick persons appeared
in 1831 at Koethen.
29. 4 Articles on Cholera appeared from Koethen in
1830, 1831.
30. Organon (2nd Edition came out) in 1819 (Leipsic)
& 3rd, 4th and 5th Edition in 1824, 1829 and 1833,
all from Koethen.
THE PREFACES
To each edition of Organon Hahnemann wrote a preface. R. E.

Dudgeon not only translated the fifth edition of Organon, (and
Hahnemann’s Lesser writings) but also rendered into english the
prefaces to the first, second, third and fourth editions. This he
did because, James Krauss among other opines.—“Everything
that Hahnemann ever wrote is of historic medical interest.”
To understand Hahnemann’s Organon it is obligatory to study
his other works too, especially his Lesser writings, the Chronic
Diseases and prefaces to Materia Medica Pura etc.
a priori (L)—‘Of itself ’, ‘out of itself alone’:
from before hand; premature; unwarranted. Unless
substantiated by ‘a posteriori’ (proved afterwards; being
verified), a decision arrived at ‘a priori’ only, is supposed
to be illogical and unscientific.
Hahnemann says “In the pure sciences of experience in
Physics, Chemistry and Medicine, merely speculative reason
can be consequently have no voice; and “Knowledge can
only be derived from pure experiences and observations.”
Up to his time every thing, be it about the nature of diseases
or about the medicines or about the mode of applying
medicine in disease conditions, was assumed and lacked as
he says, “Pure well observed experience and experiment”,
In place of all ‘a priori’ notions about Disease, Drug and
Cure, Hahnemann pointed the dynamic nature of disease,
instead of static cum material notions etc, and classified
(for the first time) diseases in three ways:
(1) Clinically (in acute and chronic);
(2) Aetiologically (in miasmatic that is microbic or bacterial;

in medicinal that is iatrogenic; in meteoric that is
electrothermal and in emotional that is psychogenic)
etc.; and
(3) Pathologically (in reversible and irreversible tissue changes.)
He not only discovered the primary causes of all the
natural or true chronic diseases, as also of the acute
specific infectious diseases in Miasms (microbes, or
micro-organisms), but also discovered the secondary
causes in individual inherited factors cum environment
etc, without the help of which the primary causes would
never be effective. He discovered and established the only
scientific method of finding the pure effect of drugs for the
first time (that is, to prove each drug on healthy human
beings) thereby establishing the symptom-similarity being
the experimental basis for the selection of drug in each
individual case. James Krauss says,” Hahnemann, the
experimenter, discovered the symptomatic source of both
pathological and therapeutic diagnosis and thereby made
the practice of medicine scientific.”
Suppose we prove a drug on healthy human beings, the
signs and symptoms produced by it will be the pure effects
of it. But to infer that these signs and symptoms, if found
in a patient, will be cured by this drug, is “a priori.” Only
when these signs and symptoms, if found in a patient, are
cured by this drug it is proved ‘a posteriori’. These two
modes together make the knowledge about a drug, or for
that matter anything, logical and scientific.
Alterantia (L)—Alterative medicine
A medicine supposed to bring alteration in (to change) the

disease condition; as for example, the mercurials. These
always aggravated the troubles instead of minimising them
Contraria Contrariis (L)—
Contraries by contraries, opposites. Shortened form of
‘Contraria Contrariis Curantur’ which please see.
Contraria Contrariis Curantur (L)—
Opposites are treated by opposites; Treat contraries by
contraries
The guiding rule of Antipathy or Enantiopathy or
palliative mode of treatment. Hahnemann defines it as—
“it employs, — remedies that immediately suppress and
hide the morbid symptoms by the motive to disregard the
rest of the totality of symptoms and treat only one, the
most troublesome, complaint”, viz-a pain or insomnia or
high blood pressure or high blood-sugar etc. Hahnemann
shows the fallacy in the following way, sec. 61: “that as
a medicinal action antagonistic to the symptoms of the
disease — is followed by only transient relief, and after
that is passed, by invariable aggravation “etc.
Contraria Contrariis Curantur (Treat opposites by
opposites: opposites are treated by opposites),— was one
of the two rules framed, originally, by Hippocrates (460-
370 B.C.); the other being Similia Similibus Curantur,
which means Similars are treated by Similars or Treat likes
by likes. Hippocrates, experience, found in the Corpus
Hippocraticus, was that if the disease be curable it should
be treated according to the rule of similia and if incurable
it should be treated by the rule of contraria (that is, it

should be palliated).
But Hippocrates words were neglected by C. Galen (138-
201 A.D.). The directions to all physicians to treat “with
the rule contraria contrariis of the hypothesis-framer
Galen” were followed by the schoolmen for long 1200
years, till Paracelsus (1493-1541) raised his voice against it.
He even burnt Galen and Avicenna’s (980-1037) writings
publicly. Paracelsus said, as he proved, that diseases can
only be cured with the similars. He too, like Hippocrates,
had to wait to be understood till Hahnemann came.
Please also see the Introduction where Hahnemann quotes
Hippocrates.
Organon de l’ art de guerir
Traduit d’ original allemand du Dr. S. Hahneman Conseiller
du son altesse serenissime le Duc d’Anhalt Koethen par Erneste
George De Brunnow, a Dresde, chez Arnold, Liraire - editeur
1824 (Fr.).
Organon of the art of Healing, translated from the
original German of Dr. S. Hahnemann Counseller of
His Highest Serenity the Duke of Anhalt—Koethen, by
Earnest George von Brunnow, Dresden, Printer-Publisher
Arnold-1824. The second edition was translated into
French by von Brunnow.
Plethora (L)—
“Excess of blood”; “Which” Hahnemann says, “is never
present.” In fevers and inflammations it was assumed that
there was plethora, hence the practice of drawing of blood
through either leeches or venesections etc. Hahnemann

denounced vehemently this criminal practice based on
false notions. “He says (in the first F. N. in the preface to
the 6th Edition) “The blood of the patient is made to flow
mercilessly by bleedings, leeches, cuppings, scarifications
to diminish an assumed plethora which never exists.”
R. E. Dudgeon says—“It is beyond question that it
was mainly owing to the treatment and practice of
Hahnemann and his disciples that the disastrous methods
in vogue for Centuries previous to and far into his time,
have been abandoned.”
Similia similibus (L)—
Similars by similars; likes by likes; used eight times in
the Fifth and Sixth edition and in the introduction. It is
the shorter form of Similia Similibus Curantur’, which
please see.
Similia Similibus Curantur—
Similars are treated by similars: Treat similars by similars.
One of the two maxims framed originally, by Hippocrates.
Hahnemann but changed it to similia similibus curentur,
which please see.
Similia Similibus Curentur (L)—
Let like be treated by likes; Let similars be treated by
similars. The guiding rule of the Homoeopathic system
of medicine, introduced by Hahnemann. This full form
has been used only once in the Introduction (and in a
letter to the French minister of Public Instruction (1835).
Curentur & Curantur (L)—

Curentur is weakened imperative form of the subjunctive,
or an optative form, a guiding principle; whereas curantur
is assertive, exclusive and strong imperative form, a
fundamental doctrine.
“Hahnemann never wrote curantur, not even in the sixth
and final edition, Hahnemann retained Curentur with
definitely conscious reason.”
R. Haehl
“—any Homoeopath, who has not become emancipated
from absolutistic thinking, is but another indication of
where he sill stands in the theory of Science.”
“Hahnemann seldom succumbed to this temptation and
certainly never put his methodical principle in the assertive
form Curantur, but in the optative Curentur. This is not
a purely linguistic matter as Bier, among others supposes.
Hahnemann was a first rate scholar.”
O. Leeser
“Curantur is generally understood to mean are treated
whereas there can be no doubt that 999 persons out of
every 1000 would render it ‘are cured’. It is not easy to say
how the alteration of curentur into curantur came to be
made. Hahnemann used the former in the organon from
its first edition onwards, and again in a letter in 1835 to
the French Minister of Public Instruction.”
R. Hughes
Again replying to question and comment, for and
favouring Curantur of Dr. Reinke and P. P. wells
respectively. R. Hughes ‘explains—“The real question is

whether Homoeopathy is such a law as that of gravitation.
It is an inference from certain observed facts; shall we
state the inference, by an affirmation, universal, exclusive
unchanging, that likes are cured by likes or by a practical
conclusion admitting of qualification and exception
Let likes be treated by likes? I must follow Hahnemann
himself in thinking the latter the utmost for which we
have warrant— I affirm that my practical wisdom lies in
following the rule let likes be treated by likes” as fully as
I am able.
Richard Hughes
...Whether it is more correct to say similia similibus
curantur of similia similibus curentur; is the axiom to be
taken as a fundamental doctrine or as a guiding principle
of the Subjunctive?
“—he (Samuel Hahnemann) always gave the shortened
form Similia Similibus. But in the Introduction to the
First Edition of the Organon page v, he writes similia
similibus curentur. The sentence remain unaltered till
the Fifth edition. Hahnemann never wrote curantur, not
even in the sixth and final edition”.
R. Haehl
“The Latin formula employed by Hahnemann is
frequently written erroneously similia similibus curantur
and as erroneously translated like cures likes. Hahnemann
was too good a Latin scholar to use the verb ‘curare’ in
the sense of to cure; besides he always wrote the formula
Similia Similibus Curentur, thereby giving an imperative

or mandatory form to the phrase. The translation must
evidently be “let likes be treated by likes.”
R. E. Dudgeon
“The Homoeopathist does not pretend that the above
law is universally applicable, but he does contend that it
affords the best method thus far known to medicine for
the selection of the remedy for the cure of the sick.”
Mc. Gavack
Vis Medicatrix (L)—In place of medicine, Instead of medicine;
It is the shortened form of vis medicatrix naturae which
please see.
Vis Medicatrix Naturae (L)—Nature in place of medicine, rely
on self-help (nature) than on medicine which means it is
better to leave the patients to nature (the vital principle)
than give them medicines. This had been the approach of
physicians, up to Hahnemann’s time, who thought that
the vital principle was omnipotent and would do every
thing needed for the suffering individual. This idea was
substantiated by the fact that the then prevailing medicines
did more harm than help the patients. Hahnemann
shows the inefficiencies of this vital principle, especially
to get rid of the chronic diseases among others, and its
harmful, to the extent of fatal, ways to get rid of severe
acute diseases too.
The Introduction
The essay, “indication of the Homoeopathic employment

of medicines in ordinary practice.” Published at Torgau
in 1807. Formed the basis of the Introduction to the
Organon, although the beginning and end portions are
different. The Introduction, which appeared for the first
time in the fourth edition, again went through changes
in the fifth and sixth editions. In the Introduction he
set his newly discovered rules of healing over against the
traditional treatments and accompanied his axioms with
numerous examples. It was mainly divided into 2 parts;
Review of the allopathy of the old school of medicine and
the instances of homoeopathic practice in the old school,
which was omitted from the fifth edition.
ab usu in morbis (L)—
From the use in disease; knowledge obtained from the use
of medicines in diseases (disease conditions only; clinical
experience.
The knowledge of medicines only so gathered was (and
is) bound to be, according to Hahnemann conjecture and
“false deduction”, mainly for two reasons among others.
1. As “the effects of most of medicines were and
continued to remain, unknown” and which can
only be had by proving each drug on healthy human
beings and
2. “The mixture in a prescription of various medicinal
substances.” Especially when each prescription had
to contain at least six types of medicine, viz-
(a) The Basis (base)

(b) The Adjuvance (helper)
(c) The Constituens (supporter)
(d) The Corrigens (corrective)
(e) The Excipiens (directing medicine);
(f ) The Dirigens (directing medicine); and these in
very large doses.
Hahnemann points out sarcastically, as always, the
inherent fallacy of these conjectural, unscientific and
harmful procedures. On the other hand he shows the
need of proving each medicine on healthy human beings,
the only way to know the pure effects of any drug, before
administration; as also to give only one drug at a time,
on the basis of symptom-similarity, and to administer as
minimum a dose as possible to effect a cure. An example
of the then prevailing ‘usus in morbis’ would not be out
of place.
“In the introduction to the “Organon” page xLii had
appeared.
For Caries of bones Hecker used several mixtures of
medicines with material success. Fortunately for him,
quicksilver was contained in all these mixtures and it
was the only one which could conquer this malady
homoeopathically. This passage gave rise to a violent
dispute. The ‘organon’ had appeared in the first half of
1810. In July of the same year the attacked Berlin professor
A. F. Hecker, hastened to reply and made the following
statement on the above question.
I used nothing more than.

1. A simple solution of corrosive sublimate in distilled
water with Liq Myrrh.
2. Powders for internal use of calomel, sulphur of
antimony and sugar.
3. Some purgatives of calomel mixed with jalap on
account of a great many round worms. Greater
simplicity was impossible
Whoever calls the remedies used “Several mixtures
of medicines” Lies—
“Lies” was italicised and further emphasised by a dash,
although the author himself had to admit that he had used
five medicines at the same time. If that is simple, what
were the mixtures like and the conviction underlying his
‘Greater simplicity was impossible’ shows the great delight
of that time in prescriptions.”
R. Haehl
Adjuvantia/adjuvans (L)—
Adjuvants, assisting medicines, helpers, helping medicine,
supporting medicine. It is one of the six types of medicine,
each prescription had to contain upto, Hahnemann’s time
(or even after). The six types of component are:
1. The Basis, that is the principal medicine or the
effective medicine or the main medicine.
2. The Adjuvans’, that is the assisting (to above)
medicine.
3. The constituens or supporting medicine; the vehicle
giving the necessary (liquid or solid) body to the
whole.
4. The Corrigens, that is the corrective or correcting

medicine or the blood purifying, the humor
correcting medicine; the complement added for
certain auxiliary purposes of smell, taste, colour etc.
5. The Dirigens, that is director or directing the basic
medicine and
6. The Excipiens, that is the receiver (a medicine
supposed to enable the system to receive the basis
well).
Hahnemann criticised and ridiculed this practice and
insisted upon single, already proved drug as medicine,
instead.
Aequalia aequalibus (L)—
Equals by equals, the same by the same, identicals by
identicals. It is the shorter form of Aequalia Aequalibus
Curantur, which please see.
Aequalia Aequalibus curantur (L)—
Treat equals by equals; equals (same) are treated by equals
(same); (idem) identicals are treated by identicals. The
guiding principle of the Isopathic medicine was founded
by M. Lux and later supported by Gross among others.
Hahnemann himself defines it as “—Isopathy, as it is
called-that is to say, a method of curing a given disease by
the same contagious principle that produces it.”
It is clear from Sec, 26 (which please see), that the curative
agents should be different in kind from the agent which
caused the disease.
Hahnemann says again in the foot note to Sec 56, “But

to use a human morbific matter (a psorin taken from the
itch in man) as a remedy for the same human itch or for
evils arisen therefrom is—?
Nothing can result from this but trouble and aggravation
of disease.”
J.T. Kent too says—“In certain places it prevails and is
taught that anything relating to syphilis must be treated
with Syphilinum; that anything relating to gonorrhoea
must be treated with Medorrhinum, anything psoric
must be treated with Psorinum and anything that relates
to tuberculosis must be treated with Tuberculinum.
“This will go out of use some day; it is mere Isopathy,
and it is an unsound doctrine. It is not better idea of
Homoeopathy. It is not based upon sound principles, it
belongs to a hysterical Homoeopathy that prevails in this
century. Yet much good has come out of it.”
But—Hahnemann had also said in the foot note to sec
56. “Seeing that the virus is given to the patient highly
potentised, and thereby, consequently, to a certain degree
in an altered condition, the cure is effected only by
opposing a similimum to a similimum.”
Mc. Gavack says—“Isopathy and Homoeopathy establish
no exclusive dogma. They offer valuable principles in
treatment which, In the opinion of Bier, are actually more
fruitful than the third rule Allopathy, but by no means
take its place.”
Alloia (gk)—Different, dissimilar.

Allopathy Heteropathy, dissimilar treatment (treatment by
dissimilar medicines)
Hahnemann invariably uses alloeopathy; only his followers
use this convenient form. For example— use of purgatives
for hydrocephalus or any fever, etc. Hahnemann defines
it (in Sec 55) as “The allopathic or heteropathic. Which,
without any pathological relation to what is actually
diseased in the body, attacks the parts most exempt from
the disease, in order to draw away the disease through
them.”
Aphrodisiaca (L)—aphrodisiacs, Ambergris, Lacerta scincus,
Cantharides etc.
Autenrieth’s salve—
Tartar emetic ointment.
Basis (L)—Basic medicine, effective or main medicine One of
the six components of each prescription Prevalent for
more than two thousand years. Please see Adjuvans too.
Causa chronicorum morborum (L)—
Cause of chronic diseases. It remained unknown till
Hahnemann found out the three fundamental miasms-
psora, syphilis and sycosis (gonorrhoea) as the cause of
all true (natural) chronic diseases. He says in Sec. 78 (last
line)-“Chronic diseases. They are caused by, infection
with a chronic miasm”. Again in Sec. 78 (first line) The
true natural chronic diseases are those that arise from
a chronic miasm, which when left to themselves, and
unchecked by the employment of those remedies that are
specific for them, always go on increasing and growing

worse—torment the patient to the end of his life with
ever aggravated sufferings.” He defines Syphilis, Sycosis
and Psora in Secs. 79 80 and 81. Please also see. in the
contents Sec. 78, 79, 80 and 81 in short forms, prepared
by Hahnemann himself. The three miasms psora, syphilis
and sycosis (gonorrhoea) are also known as fundamental
causes (of the respective chronic diseases.)
Causa morbi (L)—Cause of disease, It remained unknown till
Hahnemann distinctly named various causes for various
disease conditions, specially in Secs from 72 to 81. which
please see.
Causa prima (L)—Prime cause, main cause; first cause, proximate
cause (of disease).
Hahnemann severely criticises the fallacy of the notion of
some ‘materia peccans’ or morbific (injurious) matter to
be the prime (main) cause of disease, which is to be driven
out of the body. He says, the causes are always dynamic
in nature and not material. He gives many examples,
quite a few, to prove that the miasmatic (infectious and
or contagious) cause of disease can never be material
noxious substances.
Another fallacy, that the proximate cause (which was
assumed to be always there), has to be removed first (tolle
causam) to effect a cure, is refuted by Hahnemann in
the Note to Sec. 6 of the first edition; “A thing or a state
requires a proximate cause only in order to be produced;
but once it is there, it needs no longer for its existence
an exciting, a first or a proximate cause. Thus then, the
disease, once it is produced, continues independently of its

proximate producing cause and needs the latter no longer
its maintenance. How then can its removal be held to be
essential to the cure of the disease?
On the other hand Hahnemann says, for the first time
again, that it requires always at least two causes for the
production of a disease condition (please also see Sec.
117):
1. a primary cause, an exogenous one and
2. a secondary cause or an accessory cause, an endogenous
one, without the help of which, the prime cause, of
itself, can not produce a disease condition.
The primary cause may be one of the following.
(a) Miasmatic, that is Microbic or bacterial (from
germs) viz—
(i) True chronic diseases and
(ii) Acute specific infectious diseases.
(b) Meteoric or atmospheric (due to thermic and
electric changes), viz Sun stroke, frost-bite etc.
(c) Telluric-viz soil borne diseases.
(d) Medicinal viz drug diseases (iatrogenic diseases)
etc.
But the secondary cause is composed of the individual’s
hereditary factors, environment etc. Stuart Close elucidates
it best. He says (Page 10, Genius of Homoeopathy). “The
primary cause of Tuberculosis is the Tubercle bacillus.
The necessary conditions for (secondary causes of ) the

action of the bacillus are the peculiar bodily constitution,
predisposition, susceptibility and environment of the
patient. Without these concomitant conditions or causes,
no one would ever have tuberculosis.”
Causa Morborum Chronicorum (non venereorum) (L)—
Cause of chronic diseases (non-venereal); cause of non-
veneral true chronic diseases. Remained unknown till
Hahnemann found it out in the PSORIC Miasm.
‘Psora’ was known in Europe as a whole series of skin
troubles of the most varied kinds as KUSTHA is known
in INDIA.
He says, therefore, in the chronic diseases “I call it
PSORA—to give it a general name.”
“In this collection we see the most diverse skin diseases
grouped with itch, scald head, various kinds of lichen,
leprosy, swollen glands of the neck and facial eruptions.
This is certainly sufficient proof of how widely Hahnemann
understood the term “Itch” or “PSORA”.—R. Haehl
Hahnemann says (in the F. N. to prima causa morbi) that
only he “discovered the exciting cause of all other (non-
venereal) chronic diseases to be an infection at one period
or another with psora)”.
He defines psora in Sec. 80, 81 and 206 and describes it
in the Chronic Diseases, (which please see).
Causam Tolle (L)—Remove the cause; finish (annihilate) the
cause, a dictum/maxim from the very early periods.
Hahnemann says (in para, 6) “the old school of medicine

believed it might cure disease in a direct manner by the
removal of the (imaginary) material cause of disease.” On
the contrary, he says, that we should “regard the nature
of the spiritual-corporeal organism as such a highly
potentialised entity that its sensational and functional
vital changes, which are called diseases, must be produced
and effected chiefly, if not solely, by dynamic (sensational)
influences, and could not be effected in any other way.”
Again “It is impossible to know all the antecedents
causative of disease consequents. Tolle causam is easier said
than done. How then shall we remove or palliate these
effects by medical substances? Here Hahnemann steps in
to say, for the first time in all history, remove the effects,
cessat effectus cessat causa”—James Krauss.
Chronic Miasms These are Psora, Syphilis and Sycosis
(Gonorrhoea).
These miasms are the basic/fundamental causes of true
(natural) chronic diseases—(Psora, Syphilis and Sycosis
respectively).
By a chronic disease Hahnemann meant a true or natural
disease-condition produced by (caused by) one of the three
miasms, Psora, Syphilis, Sycosis,
(i) which is contagious/infectious in nature;
(ii) continues till the death of the person, even to the
next generations, and
(iii) is incurable, in nature, if not efficiently cured with the
help of homoeopathic medicines (proper medicinal
treatment).
By miasm Hahnemann meant infective agent (Sec. 81

1st line) and these are contagious in nature. Please see
also first ever Footnote in the Introduction, Sec. 72 last
line, Sec. 80 4th line etc. & Chr. Dis. In The Chronic
Diseases too he says, “All chronic diseases of man have
as their fundamental origin firmly established chronic
miasms, by which means—their parasitical existence in
the human organism can be continually strengthened and
increased” etc.
Hahnemann also noticed 3 different important moments
in the origin of infectious diseases, both acute and chronic
diseases proper. These are
1. the moment of infection
2. the period (time) taken for the whole organism to be
penetrated by the miasm and to develop within the
organism (and Sec. 80 may also be compared with
these observations) i.e. the incubation period, and
3. the breaking out of the external sign, through
which the life principle demonstrates externally
the completion of the internal development of the
miasmatic disease throughout the whole organism.
He says in his The Chronic Diseases, 2nd edition,
Paris P. 34, “On the other hand are not the chronic,
miasma’s disease parasites which continue to live
as long as the man seized by them is alive and
which have their fruit in the eruption originally
produced by them, the itch pustule, chancre and
the fig wart, which in turn, are capable of infecting
others and which do not die off themselves like the
acute miasms, but can only be exterminated and
annihilated by a counter infection, by means of a
potency of a medicinal disease quite similar to it and

stronger than it, so that the patient is delivered from
them and recovers his health”?
Hahnemann described in further details the cholera
miasm in his article ‘Propagation of the Asiatic Cholera
(1831)’ to be composed of living animalcules, which
breed, infect etc etc. (Please see in the Lesser Writing.)
Yet it was he who again said, that for the production of
any disease conditions two factors are needed, always—
1. the inherent power of the influencing substance and
2. the capability of the vital force that animates the
organism to be influenced by it. (please see Sec. 117)
Again it was Hahnemann, who separated and
differentiated gonorrhoea from syphilis, both clinically
and aetiologically. Before him, all venereal diseases were
supposed to be syphilis.
“After nearly one hundred years of research in the
laboratory and at the sickbed, we have known that
Hahnemann was quite right, that in reality gonorrhoea
and syphilis are totally different diseases and that their
bacteria have nothing at all to do with one another; whilst
gonorrhoea arises from the gonococcus discovered by
Neisser, the soft chancre is caused by spirochaeta pallida,
Schaudinn”
—R. Haehl
Hence syphilis and gonorrhoea are specific-infectious
diseases whereas psora is not one specific infectious
diseases, but a group of specific infectious diseases, chronic
and non-venereal in nature.
Hahnemann gives the following definition in the footnote

to Sec 214 of the 3rd Edition, 1823:
“The condylomatous disease is a product of the whole
organism chiefly by sexual intercourse. It usually causes a
bad sort of urethral or preputial gonorrhoea. There sprout
up growths most frequently behind the corona glandis,
thereafter on the other parts of the genitals. These often
exude moisture and bleed readily. These growths are the
local symptoms of disease just as the chancre is that of
the syphilitic malady. These two diseases have nothing in
common with one another in their essential nature, and
yet the condylomatous disease, because it too is caused
by infection during coition, was held to be identical with
the venereal chancrous disease.” etc.
(Syphilis) “Soon after infection and even before the chancre
appears as a small vesicle, soon changing into a little open
ulcer, with itching, pricking sensations, sensitive persons
experience distinct signs of general indisposition and
even when the general symptoms are less apparent, the
complete infection of the whole organism before the out
break of the chancre is incontestably proved by this, that
even excision of the chancre on its very first appearance
does not diminish, let alone destroy the total disease
If this local manifestation be dispelled (burnt away or
destroyed in any other way, that is, removed.)
“The general conditions replace the loss of the chancre—
by the production of new accidents which are much worse
than the dispelled chancre. The sufferings now burst forth
soon (inguinal buboes) or late as ulceration of the tonsils,
eruption of papules or sports, flat, painless smooth, round

cutaneous ulcers, rough growth on the uvula or on the
alae nasi, or show themselves as constant tickling cough
with purulent expectoration, stiffness of the joints, with
purulent expectoration, nocturnally painful swellings of
periosteum and bones etc. Further he has observed the
chronic diseases in 4 different stages:
(a) Primary (as long as the local manifestation is there).
(b) Secondary, when the local manifestation is just not
there.
(c) Tertiary, at later stage after the previous one and
(d) Congenital.
For further details-please see his chronic diseases. Lastly,
most interesting and absorbing comment may be seen in
the footnote to sec 25 of the 3rd edition 1824. Both the
section and the footnote to it may, please, be seen below.
Sec 25 “for, 1st, diseases are cured by medicines, which
would not be possible unless the latter were more
powerful, the following is to be taken into consideration:
various pathogenic causes act on us daily and hourly, but
they are unable to upset our equilibrium and to make
the healthy ill; the activity of the life preserving power
within us tends to resist the most of them, and as a rule
the individual remains sound”1 etc.
F.N.—1. “In considering the action of morbific agents,
I exclude the great specific miasms, such as typhus fever,
plague of the levant, the yellow fever of America, and
other infectious diseases small-pox, measles, the smooth
scarlet fever, the purpura miliaris, the venereal chancrous
disease, ordinary and the condylomatous gonorrhoea, the

itch of wool workers etc, which do certainly possess the
power of infecting human beings almost unconditionally.
I say almost for even among them there are not a few
exceptions.”
Confortantia (L)—strengthening medicine. The excitantia
and aphrodisiacs are stimulating medicines, And
all the excitantia, cofortantia, roborantia, tonica,
nervina etc. are exciting, stimulating and strengthening
medicines. Hahnemann says “these are, properly speaking,
enantiopathic”, antipathic or palliative in nature.
These may be compared to today’s tonics, vitamins and
minerals etc.
Corrigentia (L)—Corrective medicine. A medicine supposed to
correct and cleanse the humors.
De combustionibus Libellus (L)—A dissertation (little book)
on (related to) burns.
Derivatives—Evacuating mode of treatment. Evacuations, as
a process of treatment, through vomiting, stool, urine,
sweat or saliva through emetic, purgative, diaphoretic,
sialogogue etc.
Dissolvents—Dissolving medicines, supposed to dissolve the
disease-matter inside. They imagined and presupposed a
morbific substance to be dissolved and expelled.
Duce Natura (L)—Follow nature; imitate nature (vital principle).
F.N.-Hahnemann says. “In the ordinary school of
medicine, the efforts made by nature for the relief of the
organism in diseases, where no medicine was given, were
regarded as models of treatment, worthy of imitation. But

this was a great error.”
(Elias etc) (GK)—Elias was a mortal man like us.
(Epidemion) (GK)—the Epidemics
Examples of involuntary homoeopathic cures in old

school practice.
Achillea millifolium—in haemorrhage.
Acid nitric—in salivation and ulceration of fauces.
Aconite—in pains of limbs and joints.
Agaricus muscarius—in epilepsy.
Anise seed—in flatulent colic.
Arnica montana—in Contusions
Arsenic—in cancer; plague, buboes, carbuncle, ague, angina
pectoris.
Belladonna—in Hydrophobia, insanity, amaurosis
Camphor—in low nervous fevers and influenza.
Cantharides—in strangury and gonorrhoea.
Clematis-in Cutaneous disease.
Cinchona—in gastralgia, vomiting, diarrhoea, syncope, jaundice,
depression of vital powers, indigestion, anorexia.
Colchicum—in dropsy and asthma.
Conium—is asthma, whoop, dysuria and amaurosis.
Cowpox—in small pox
Cuprum—in epilepsy
Dictamnus—in leucorrhoea
Dulcamara—in disease from chill, convulsions, eczema, herpes.
Electricity—in ague, convulsions, ophthalmia, varices
Euphorbia—in dropsy.
Euphrasia—in lippitudo (marginal blepharitis)
Hot baths—in fever and encephalitis
Hyoscyamus—in epilepsy, agrypnia, insanity, vertigo, ptosis,
dysphagia, cough
Ignatia—in convulsions.
Ipecacuanha—in haemorrhages, spasmodic asthma, diarrhoea
Jalap (Jalapa)—in colic.
Mercury—in inflammation of mouth, imbecility, salivation, sore
throat, apthae, caries.
Moschus—in spasmodic asthma
Nux-moschata—in fainting fits
Opium— in convulsions, sopor, lethargic epilepsy, constipation,
ileus.
Plumbum—in constipation, ileus, hypochondriasis.
Potash—in tetanus.
Purgatives—in diarrhoea.
Rose-water—in ophthalmia.
Rhus—in vesicular eruption and paralysis.
Sabina—in uterine haemorrhage.
Sambucus—in dropsy.
Scilla—in pleurisy.
Senna—in colic.
Solanum nigrum—in dropsy.
Stannum—in phthisis and gastralgia
Stramonium—in delusions, convulsions, loss or memory.
Sudorifics—in sweating sickness.
Sulphur—in dysentery, haemorrhoids, itch, asphyxia.
Tea—in anxiety, palpitation, gastralgia, convulsions and
exhaustion.
Tobacco—in vertigo, nausea, anxiety.
Turpentine—in dropsy and sciatica.
Uva ursi—in purulent urine.
Veratrum album—in cholera.
Wine—in inflammatory fevers, phrenitis, delirium.
Elias anthropos yn homoiopatheis ymin (Gk)*

Elias was only a mortal man like us.
Epidemion (Gk)—The epidemics.
Excitantla—Exciting, stimulating medicine. Please also see
confortantia.
Foxglove—Digitalis.
Genesis—source production.
Gnothi Seauton (Gk)*—Know theyself.
hia ta omoia nousos ginetai, Kai hia ta omoia prostheromena
ek nouseonton ugiainontai—hia to emeein emetos panetai
(Gk)*
Illness arises by similar things and by similar things can
the sick be made well; vomiting can be made to cease by
means of emetics.
This is only a shortened sentence from a passage, of
the book ascribed to Hippocrates (or his student), The
localisation of man’ or ‘the localities of mankind. The full
passage reads as below.
An illness is caused by similar means and similar means
can cure men of illness, e.g. the same agent brings about
strangury, when it is not present, and does away with it,
when it is. Coughing, like strangury, is caused and is made
to disappear by the same means, vomiting is stopped by
being made to vomit.
homoion pathos (Gk)*—similar suffering, similar disease,
* Please compare the greek texts in the author’s.
TRANSLATION OF ALL THE NON-ENGLISH TEXTS IN THE
ORGANON.
Idem (L)—tauton (Gk); same, identical.

Kai ymeit omoiopatheis esmen umin anthropoi (Gk)—we too
are of similar (mortals) as you.
Isopathy—Treatment by identicals, (please also see Aequalia).
In the Chronic Diseases, Hahnemann remarks. “The
antipsoric medicines treated of in the following volumes
contain no so called isopathic remedies because their
pure effects, even those of the potentised itch miasm
(psora) are a long way from being sufficiently proved to
enable us to made a sure homoeopathic use of them. I
say homoeopathic, for the prepared itch matter does not
remain idem, even if given to the patient from whom it
was taken; because, if it is to him good it can only do
so in a potentised state—just as gold leaf, after being
potentised, is no longer crude (leaf ) gold without action
on the human body, but at every stage of its potentisation
is more and more modified and altered.”
Lege artis (L)—According to the rules of art.
Libellus de Stramoniae (L)—A dissertation on stramonium.
Male fern-root—Filix Mas.
Materia peccans (L)—morbific matter, noxious material
substances. Please also note as foot note to Sec. 11, the
mark of exclamation. This is one of the finest examples
of sarcasm, characteristic of Hahnemann, mixed with
humour. Please read the first line of Sec. 11; defining
illness, he points out the dynamic influence upon, this
spiritual, self acting (automatic) vital force, and then mark
the foot note to the materia peccans.
In place of viewing the disease condition as a state of

being of the organism, wherein it is dynamically altered
by the morbidly deranged vital force as an altered state
of health” the old school still clings to some material
injurious substance as the cause of disease. He denies any
Materia Peccans, that is noxious material to be the prime
aetiological factor of any true, natural disease condition,
also there is nothing material to take away, nothing to
smear away, to burn or tie or cut away, without making
the patient more incurable.”
Medicine—The medicinal property of those material substances
which we call medicines proper, relates only to their energy
to call out alterations in the well being of animal life. Only
upon this conceptual principle of life depends their helath-
altering, conceptual dynamic influence. F. N. to Sec. 11.
Metastasis—Direction of disease to other parts: development of
disease in parts at a distance from the seat of the disease.
Metaschematismen (Gn)—metastases, morbid processes.
Mercuralia (L)—mercurial preparation, viz calomel, corrosive
sublimate etc.
Minister naturae (L)—serve the nature; assist nature, also
servants of nature, Please also see Duce natura
Nervina (L)—strengthening medicine, stimulating medicines,
tonics.
Non plus ultra (L)—There is nothing beyond
Organum (L)—Latin version of organon.
Peri topon ton kat anthropon (Gk)*—This name of the book
supposed to be written by a student of Hippocrates, has
been translated as The localities of mankind” by R. Haehl,

and ‘The localisation in man’ by O. Leeser.
PSORA—“This word expressed a common idea about a whole
series of skin troubles of the most varied kinds.” It was
known from the very earliest times, as soraeleia (greek)
and psorat (hebrew).
Hahnemann was familiar with this age-old expression and
used the word in a wider sense too, although he knew the
cause of itch, the itch mite (Acarus scabiei or Sarcoptes
hominis), also its destruction by external remedies and
digging out of the mite from its burrow (Please see the
article on it in the Lesser Writings.) He shared also the
view of his contemporaries that “the itch eruption could
only be developed on a favourable fostering ground, called
internal psora. The latter, however, was not cured with the
destruction or removal of the mites, although of course
it was necessary first of all to remove the parasite. Psora,
internal itch, was totally different, in his opinion, from
the external ailment, the primary eruption. The latter
could be cured quickly and easily, whilst the internal psora
often remaining latent for a long time and only showing
secondary symptoms as a result of special factors, was a
wearisome disease.” R. Haehl
In other words newly contracted itch (or any such disease)
infects the whole body. This in turn develops into chronic
disease and eruption. This internal affection is very
difficult to cure whereas the primary eruption is very easily
cured by sulphur etc.
Psora, according to Hahnemann, “is a disease,” then

“a disposition to disease, hereditary from generation to
generation for thousands of years, and it is the fostering
soil for every possible disease condition. At the same time
it is the most infectious of all. Contact with the general
external skin is quite sufficient for transference of the
disease in contrast with sycosis and syphilis, in which
cases a certain amount of friction on the tenderest parts
where most nerves are congregated and where the cuticle
is thinnest, is requisite for infection.”
R. Haehl
“Further-hereditary transmission for thousands of years
has of course, generated an increasing number of the
forms of disease, so that their poly morphous symptoms
are nowadays almost innumerable. An unusually large
number of diseases stated in the pathology of the older
school to be definitely secondary symptoms of the
underlying miasmatic malady, now coming to light,
namely psora” Chronic Diseases.
Repellents and reprecutients—suppressing medicines
Roborantia (L)—Strengthening medicine, Please see excitantia
etc.
Secundum artem (L)—according to rule
Si modo essent (L)—If only they were
St Yve’s salve—Chief ingredient of which is red oxide of mercury
Typus (L)—Periodicity, periodical attacks
Ueber die Erfahrung (Gn)—on the experience.
Unguenta nervina (L)—Stimulating and strengthening
substances, tonics.
THE ESSENCE OF INTRODUCTION
In the earliest periods of mankind’ the mode of living was

simple. Diseases too were rare. With progress of civilisation
men fell ill oftener and the need of medicines increased
proportionately. But the recorded history of medicine of
about 2500 years, except and after Hippocrates, betrays
shameful ignorance about disease, drug and cure. It is
the history of utter failure everywhere. There have been
of course improvement in almost all accessory subject,
chemistry, physics, botany, zoology, biology, especially
in physiology and anatomy. But the healing art or the
curing of patients has remained a failure. Not only that,
The procedures undertaken in the name of treatment have
been cruel and criminal, almost always.
Dignitaries founded systems one after another. Each
system produced theories promising and high sounding,
only to be superceded by another soon after. Each had its
rational hypothesis and adequate procedures, but to fail
at the sickbeds. Each sought after the cause of disease and
assured to remove it, only the patients died. They tried
to follow the nature and did what the nature does-as the
ideal of treatment. But to what results? The graveyards
were broadened.
All have been saying Remove the cause and have been
working, treating patients, accordingly.
But take an example. In fevers and inflammations etc.
there was excess of blood they thought. This excess of
blood, the cause of fevers or inflammations or epistaxis
or bleeding piles or haemoptysis or haematemesis was

to be removed. It was done either through vensections,
or leeches. In the same way bile was extracted from the
people having bilious fevers, emetics prescribed to remove
the cause of gastric derangements, purgatives to remove
the cause of all abdominal troubles etc. It was “Causal
Medicine” they said.
Again-the repellent drugs were applied for drying up
running from leg ulcers (by zinc/lead-oxides), chancres
were cauterised, condylomata destroyed locally, eruptions
were dried up with, ointments, tumours, cysts were cut off
neatly. All these to remove the cause of disease effectively.
This sort of treatment was done and is also continuing
up to date.
Here is another ideal way of treatment. Nature, whenever
diseased, evacuated in various ways-by purging, vomitings,
sweating, expectorating, diureting, bleeding etc. to get
rid of the disease. According to the rule ‘follow nature’
all the patients were either given purgatives or emetics or
diaphoretics or expectorants, diuretics or emmenagogues
and the like, as ideal treatment.
Because, the excretions or the products of disease were
supposed to be causes or the least the maintainers of
disease. Hence these had to be done away with and these
theories have all along been dignified with the names of
the scholars of the old school.
Further-some disease-producing material substance was
supposed to be inside the body to be drawn out. Holes
were cut in the diseased bodies, setons were fixed in the
bodies, a part burnt, blister producing drug or animal

products were used-all for turning the ulcers into chronic
ones so that the acridities, noxious substances could be
excreted out and could cleanse the body.
To do all this they were supported only by the very
vague, general type of knowledge about the drugs. This
continues from the time of Dioscorides. This knowledge
is merely whether they were diuretic or emetic, purgative,
etc. Nobody knew any thing about any particular drug’s
peculiar individual capability, when only this knowledge
of any and every drug’s disease producing power in healthy
human beings, may be of any value in curing diseases.
Again-nobody cared to observe that any disease (if not
mechanically, materially produced) is only a dynamic
change both sensational and functional, in the highly
potentialised entiry, and these vital changes show the
nature of the disease and are conceived through symptoms
and signs. The ultimate changes are only results of disease
and the disease products, but never the cause of disease.
Also nobody perceived that the measures taken by the
vital force (nature) are not only inefficient but also
harmful, even fatal. And this irrational, unintelligent vital
principle readily accepts chronic miasms which, it can
never minimise, let alone get rid of (of itself ). In acute
diseases too, its measures are mostly incompetent, even
to the point of death and these procedures of nature were
followed by the hallowed physicians all along.
Hence, the essential nature of disease (vital changes
in a highly potentialised, dynamic living whole), also
the essential nature of medicine (only ascertainable by
proving drugs in healthy humans) remained unknown.

No wonder-the cure, depending always on the exact
observation and knowledge of above two factors, in its true
sense, remained unknown too. But had people cared to
observe minutely, they would have found out the only way
to cure, rapidly, gently and permanently, each disease-by
the therapeutic law of nature, that is chose in each case
of disease a drug, which is capable of producing similar
symptoms in healthy humans, to cure this one.
It is not that nobody observed this golden rule ever before.
Hippocrates, Detharding, Bertholon. Thoury, von Stoerck
and Stahl etc. have observed it again and again.
Even the non-medical men, also wise old people have
observed the same thing, and from whom the only curative
substances, we have today, have been received. These are
peruvian bark of marsh ague, mercury for syphilis, snow
for frost-bite and heat (or hot alcohol/turpentine oil) for
burns, Man was so near the truth, yet remained so far
from it.
THE DICTIONARY OF ORGANON

THE TEXT
Accessory Circumstances: §§ 5, 94, 208; F.N. to § 81

Contributing causes; modifying factors; external and internal
conditions.
Man is inseparable from his environment. And he being
a biological whole, is in the continuous process of adaptation
with his outer world, his environment. Failure to adjust with
his environment is expressed through signs and symptoms. The
cause of disease is, therefore, both in the man and outside and
these are many.
The knowledge of the proximate cause of a disease condition
is not enough. Helpful to the physician will be the enquiry into
other contributing causes or accessory circumstances, which
are very many and part of one’s environment. Any one or more
of which may be responsible for increasing, lengthening or
complicating a disease-condition, especially if it be of chronic
nature. These are to be well assessed and should be removed or
controlled or modified according to the individual’s need.
§ 5, “The ascertainable physical constitution of the patient
(especially when the disease is chronic), his moral and intellectual
character, his occupation, mode of living and habits, his social and
domestic relations, his age, sexual function etc. are to be taken
into consideration.”
The ‘etc.’ means—there are other contributing factors too.
These are diet, clothing, air, housing, neighbours, economic
condition, ignorance, superstition, religious belief, attitude and
the like.
“All these modifying factors must be observed, considered,

weighed and their influence estimated in treating a case.”
—S. Close
Accessory Symptoms of Disease: § 95
Obscure symptoms.
Some symptoms, due to chronicity and insidious nature,
become part of life and are almost forgotten by the patient.’
These are, therefore, not reported to the physician. These obscure
symptoms are known as the accessory symptoms of disease (e.g.
one has to hurry to the lavatory, as soon as he wakes up etc.)
Such symptoms, being characteristic of the individual, should
be found out, if any. Since, these help the physician choose a better
remedy. And these become much more helpful in treating the
one-sided diseases, which show by nature only very few symptoms.
§ 95, “In chronic diseases the most minute peculiarities must be
attended to partly because:
(a) they are the most characteristic and
(b) the patients become so used to their long suffering
that they pay little or no heed to the lesser accessory
symptoms
(c) often very useful in determining the choice of the
remedy.”
Accessory Symptom of Medicine: §§ 163, 167, 168, 180, 181
Medicinal aggravation.
The new symptoms, which appear after a wrong medicine;
Medicinal aggravation.
If a medicine be wrong, new symptoms (which are never

experienced before) appear in the patient. More wrong a medicine,
more new symptoms arise. These are known as the accessory
symptoms of medicine.
If the new symptoms be serious, the medicine is antidoted at
once. If not, we wait till the new symptoms pass away. Or, the new
symptoms are added to the original totality of symptoms and the
most similar medicine (covering all the symptoms) is prescribed.
§ 163 [a] “during its [the given medicine’s] use some symptoms
appear, which were not previously observable in the
disease, accessory symptoms of the not perfectly
appropriate remedy.”
§ 180 [b] “the medicine only imperfectly homoeopathic will
produce accessory symptoms.”
§ 181 [c] “the accessory phenomena and new symptoms should
be laid to the account of the medicament just employed,
they own their origin to it.”
§ 167 [d] “If there occur accessory symptoms, then in the case
of acute disease,
(i) we do not allow this first dose to exhaust its action,
(ii) nor leave the patient to the full duration of the action
of the remedy.
(iii) but we investigate afresh the morbid state in its now
altered condition and
(iv) add the remainder of the original symptoms to those
newly developed in tracing a new picture of the
disease.” Just to get the remedy.
Accidental Symptoms:
F.N. to § 67
If one or more unimportant symptoms be seen not conforming
to the rest of the totality of symptoms, indicating a remedy, these
may be overlooked.
“The true totality is more than the mere numerical of whole
number of symptoms. It may even exclude some of the particular
symptoms, if they cannot, at the time, be logically related to the
case. Such symptoms are called ‘accidental symptoms,’ and are
not allowed to influence the choice of the remedy.”
—S. Close
“It does not follow that a homoeopathic medicine has been
ill selected for a case of disease because some of the medicinal
symptoms are only antipathic to some of the less important and
minor symptoms of the disease; if only the other, the stronger,
well marked (characteristic), and peculiar symptoms of the disease
are covered and matched by the same medicine with similarity of
symptoms, that is to say, overpowered, destroyed and extinguished;
the few opposite symptoms also disappear of themselves after the
expiry of the term of action of the medicament.” F. N. to § 67
Accuracy of Homoeo Therapeutics:
Preface to the 6th Edn.
“It [the homoeopathy] employs for the cure ONLY those
medicines whose power of altering and deranging (dynamically)
the health it knows accurately.”
Act of Curing: § 71
The three points necessary for curing are:—
1. How to investigate each case, to know—what is to be
cured; that is—how to take up a case;
2. How to investigate each medicine, to know—what is
curative in it; that is—how to prove drugs on healthy
human beings; and
3. How to apply medicine in each case, so that only cure
is effected: that is-how to select medicine in each case
appropriately.
1. Investigation of each case is done according to instructions
(directions) laid down in the sections from 84 to 104.
2. Proving of each drug is done according to instructions
laid down in the sections from 105 to 145.
3. Appropriate employment of medicine should be as shown
in the sections from 146 to 161, (general directions,
regarding all types of disease conditions, and in sections
from 172 to 244 (directions for specific disease-conditions,
supposed, at that time, to be most difficult ones).
Further, all the acts are only to individualise, the disease
(which particular shape the disease has taken in this person), the
drug (which particular drug this person requires at this time), and
the person (which particular type of person this individual is). All
the procedures, beginning from taking up of a case to selection
of the medicine, are individualising in nature.
ACTIONS:
Alternating Action of Medicine: §§115, 251
Alternating phases of action of a medicine; multiphasic action of a
drug.
Some drugs produce, during proving, diametrically opposite
types of symptom, one after another, repeatedly. Both of these
symptoms belong to the medicine, both are its own symptoms.
The later coming symptom is not, therefore, the reaction of the
vital principle. (Because, once the reaction begins, the formerly
observed symptom does not return). This type of action is known
as the alternating action (or the multiphasic action) of the drug.
As for example:
“Incredible changeableness, at one time he jokes and jests; at
another he is lachrymose”, of Ignatia.*
“Very costive motion, with pressing out of the rectum
thereafter diarrhoeic stool”, of Bryonia.*
“Great flow of saliva, Ptyalism “And “Great dryness of the
throat and of mouth”, of Belladonna.*
“Water collects in his mouth; he must frequently spit it out.”
And—“Thirst and dryness in the throat”, of Rhus tox *
If after the employment of such a medicine, no improvement
be seen, the same medicine should be given again in the same
potency.
§251, “There are some medicines (e.g. Ignatia, also Bryonia
and Rhus tox, sometime Belladonna) whose power of altering
* M. M. Pura
man’s health consists chiefly in alternating actions—a kind of

primary action symptoms that are in part opposed to each other.
“Should the practitioner find on prescribing one of these
that no improvement follows a fresh and equally small dose of
the same medicine” is to be given.
Action of Homoeopathic Medicines:
(How do the homoeopathic medicines act?)
§§ 29, 68, 148, 280, 282 and ‘The Chronic Diseases’
The homoeopathic medicines, that is—the medicines which
have homoeopathicity to the disease-conditions, act as an aid to
body resistance.
Hahnemann refrained, originally, from describing the process,
since it cannot be seen, it can only be presumed. Only being
insisted upon he has tried to explain the probable phenomena at
various places. But before that, he says, in § 28, that “it matters
little what may be the scientific explanation of how it takes place;
and I do not attach much importance to the attempts made to
explain it. But the following view seems to [be] the most probable
one”, and the view may be seen in § 29, as also in §§ 68, 148,
280, 282 etc. and in ‘The Chronic Diseases’ too.
“Homoeopathic drugs act like antigens;* A homoeopathic
medicine taken sets up a reaction with the help of the body. This
reaction results in the elaboration of an antibody, or distinctive
principle of specific nature. Specific in the sense, that it can nullify
a certain group of symptoms.
* Any substance which when inoculated in the body, is capable of causing

the production of antibodies.
The soundest conception is—the actions of homoeopathic

drugs as an aid to body resistance”.
—G. Boericke
Action of Medicines (Drugs):
§§63-67, 114, 115.
The phase effects or phase actions of drugs
The medicinal actions are also known as the phase effects or
phase actions** of medicines. Where only one action is observed,
it is known as monophasic or uniphasic, where two (opposite in
nature) actions are observed, these are known as biphasic, and
where opposite effects are observed again and again, they are
known as multiphasic action of the drug. (RENTZ)
“As a general rule it may be stated that most poisons are double
and polyphasic only in very definite middle concentrations, while
small and large amounts, respectively, are primarily uniphasic and
have an opposing action to each other.”
—Mc. Gavack
Dynamic Action:
Introduction: § 11 and throughout the text; Organic, Organismic
action.
Action by and/or in living organism. An action which is not
one of mechanical (physical) and chemical nature. Action of the
Dynamis (i.e. life principle or vital principle). Biological action
** “By phase action is understood the alterations in the effects of a medicinal

agent or other biologic stimulus observable during the continuous
presence of the substance or following its application to an organ or
organism.” —Mc Gavack
(Bios/Bio=Life). Even if produced by a mechanical substance the

action by it in the living organism will be dynamic in nature.
Primary Action of Medicine:
§§ 63, 64, 113 etc.
Changes brought by a drug in an organism. First phase of the
biphasic effect of a drug. Drug or medicinal action; proper action
of medicine. ‘Negative phase of Almroth Wright’ This is what is
recorded, generally, in the provings.
§ 63, “Every agent that acts upon the vitality, every medicine
deranges more or less the vital force, and causes a certain alteration
in the health of the individual for a longer or shorter period. This
is termed Primary action.”
Because it is observed in living organisms only, it has to be a
‘conjoint’ action, it is superfluous to say. Only during the action of
the medicine (as long as the influence of the medicine remains) the
vital principle remains passive, and soon after the primary action
is over, the secondary action, or the reaction of vital principle, is
observed, proportionate to its strength.
If a hand be dipped in hot water, the hand will be hotter than
the normal hand. This is the primary action of hot water on the
hand. Similarly a purgative produces in a healthy body a few loose
motions. This is the primary action of an agent, on a healthy
economy, bringing change in it. The normal becomes abnormal.
Physiological Action:
Action of a material or crude dose of a drugs
Action of non-potentised drug. Definite or predetermined
effect or syndrome, resulting from maximum dose, consistent
with safety.
An example, from an orthodox pharmacopeia, reads! “To

induce sleep in an adult for some hours, so much of this hypnotic
may be given, without proving lethal.”
Secondary Action of Medicine:
§§ 62-67, 112, 114
Reaction following the proper action of drug.
Body reaction to the medicinal action; counter action; curative
action; the second phase of the biphasic action of drug. The
positive phase of A. Wright.
Although so termed, it is actually the reaction of the organism
against the medicinal action. Only, had there been no primary
action (drug effect), no secondary action could have occurred.
§ 62 (Both the counter action and the curative action are
curative body reactions. (A) If the disease condition have an
imaginable opposite state, the secondary action is called as the
counter action; B) if not— it is called simply as the curative
action.’
For Example:
In a healthy person bradycardia is produced by digitalis. The
secondary action curing it, may be called as the counteraction,
since there is an imaginable opposite state or bradycardia,
namely—tachycardia. Or, if a case of insomnia is cured, the
secondary action responsible for cure is known as the counter
action, because there is an imaginable opposite disease state,.viz.
somnolence (i.e. sleepiness). Whereas, if a neuralgia—or a pain
is cured, the secondary action curing it is simply called as the
curative action, since there is no thinkable opposite disease-state
of pain other than cure or normalcy.
Further, this is the action upon which a homoeopathic

physician depends for cure. In the preface to the 5th edition we
see,—“Homoeopathy knows that a cure can only take place by the
reaction of the vital force against the rightly chosen remedy that
has been ingested and that the cure will be certain and rapid, in
proportion to the strength with which the vital force still prevails
in the patient.”
§ 63 “To its [medicine’s] action our vital force endeavors to
oppose its own energy. This resistent action is a property, is indeed
an automatic action of our life preserving power which goes by
the name of secondary action or counter action”.
§ 64 “it (vital force) then [after primary action] appears...to
develop (A) the exact opposite condition of health (counter action;
secondary action) to this effect (primary action) produced upon
it, if there be such an opposite, or (B) if there be not in nature
a state exactly the opposite of primary action... it substitutes its
normal state (secondary action, curative action)”.
ACUTE:
Acute Disease: §§ 72, 73
Transient disease: self-limited disease; individual and collective
acute and sub-acute, disease condition. Also, acute exacerbation
of a chronic disease.
Hahnemann made the classification of diseases, that had ever
been attempted.
He divided, clinically, all disease conditions into two broad
groups: acute and chronic, in § 72:
§ 72 He defines acute disease conditions to be “rapid, morbid

processes of the abnormally deranged vital force, which have a
tendency to finish their course more or less quickly, but always
in a moderate time, These are termed acute diseases”.
He subdivides the acute disease-conditions into broadly
two groups, individual and collective. The individual disease-
conditions are of two types.
§ 73 (a) either-when an individual gets indisposed from
disregarding a rule of health or hygiene, and may be cured even
without treatment. For example, “excess in food or an insufficient
supply of it” etc.
(b) or-an acute exacerbation of a chronic disease in an
individual, excited by “physical irritations, mental emotions, and
the like;-in reality, however, they are generally only a transient
explosion of latent psora”
It does not, therefore, belong to, and is distinct from, the
acute diseases. Moreover it requires treatment. It is included in
the acute diseases, only because it is to be treated at the time, like
an acute disease condition.
Collective disease-conditions, too, are of two types: Sporadic
and Epidemic.
(c) Sporadic diseases, are those, which are caused by either
physical forces or physical substances.
“When several persons become diseased at the same time
here and there (sporadically) by meteoric [climatic, that is,-
electro-thermic] or telluric influences [that is soil and water] and
injurious agents”.
Here only such persons get affected, who have the susceptibility
(are prone) to be affected by such influences, and the diseases are
not infectious in nature. These are known as the sporadic diseases.
(d) Epidemic diseases are nothing but acute specific infectious
diseases.
“Many persons are attacked with very similar sufferings
from the same cause (epidemically); these diseases generally
become infectious (contagious) when they prevail among thickly
congregated masses of human beings.” These are epidemic
diseases.
The “exciting causes and producers” of these epidemics are
sometimes “The calamities of war, inundations [floods] and
famine,” and “sometimes they are peculiar acute miasms,”
Even due to a war, or a flood, or a famine many people, also
animals die and rot uncared for. The putrefying and degenerating
corpses give rise to various microorganisms. No wonder, epidemic
diseases, generally, occur after any one of the aforesaid disastrous
conditions.
The epidemic diseases are, clinically, of two types: recurring
and non-recurring.
According to statistics received at that time, in Europe,
Hahnemann found out ‘small pox, measles, whooping cough,
scarlet fever, mumps etc.*” to be of non-recurring type. That is, a
person once affected with any one of these, does not get it again.
In other words,—immunity is developed easily after an attack of
any one of these non-recurring diseases.
On the other hand, “plague, yellow fever, asiatic cholera
etc.*” were of recurring type. That is, there is no guarantee, that
a person would remain immune to such a disease, because he

had got it once.
*This ‘etc.’ means that there were other such diseases too. He
has also referred to the “Itch of wool workers, Typhus and Purpura
miliaria” as early as in the F. N. to § 25 of the 3rd Edition.
‘Hahnemann divides them [acute diseases] into individual and
collective diseases; and here he indicates the difference between
external and internal conditions; he discusses indispositions and
the distinction between acute diseases and exacerbated phases in
chronic diseases, between sporadic and epidemic complaints. We
have been able to make this important paragraph [ § 73] fully
comprehensible and consonant with modern knowledge”.
—P. Schmidt
Acute Exacerbation: § 73
Acute phase of a chronic Disease.
Although it looks like an acute disease it is actually the
temporarily aggravated condition of a Chronic disease, a transient
phase of it. “They are generally only a transient explosion of
latent psora”.
A chronic disease condition, say Tuberculosis, may suddenly
be excited by some physical irritation (over indulgence in sex,
or continued strenuous works etc.) or severe emotional stress or
continued mental pressure (strain) etc.
Such a condition should be treated with acute medicines,
like an acute disease. This is the reason why it has been included
in the acute diseases. Only after the disease reverts back to his
latent stage that the antipsoric (i.e. the antitubercular) medicine
is given for cure.
Acute Miasms: § 73
Those miasms, or microbes or microorganisms which are
responsible for (the prime causes of ) recurring and non-recurring
types of acute specific infectious diseases. These are causes of
‘epidemic diseases’, that is diseases which may turn into epidemic
forms, under favourable conditions, since these miasms are
infectious and contagious in nature.
Such acute miasmatic diseases are—Typhus, the itch of the
wool workers, purpura miliaris (F.N. to § 25 of 3rd Edition of
Organon) and small pox, measles, whooping cough, Scarlet fever,
mumps ‘etc’ and Plague, Yellow fever, Asiatic cholera ‘etc’. The
‘etc’s mean that there were (and are) other such diseases too.
These germs have been termed ‘fixed’ because the disease
conditions produced by them remain almost the same. Specially
the non-recurring types.
§ 100—“those epidemics resulting from a contagious principle
that always remains the same, such as Small pox, measles etc”.
It is not irrelevant here to mention that the nature of the
chronic disease producing microbes too remains almost the same.
The treatment too, may begin, therefore, with fixed medicines
(e.g. Mercury in Syphilis, Thuja in Gonorrhoea and Sulphur
etc. in Psoric disease conditions), at least in the primary stage.
Only in the secondary, tertiary, congenital and inherited cases—
“without the most minute individualisation, homoeopathy is
not conceivable”. F. N. 2, Introduction. Only at the beginning
it is that “the same mercury is efficacious in an ulcer of the glans
after impure coitus, as in all previous venereal chancres”—F.N. 1,
Introduction.
§ 103, “In the same manner as has here been taught relative to
the epidemic diseases, which are generally of an acute character,
the miasmatic chronic maladies, which, as I have shown, always
remain the same in their essential nature.”
Aggravations
Disease Aggravation
If after the administration of the remedy one or more new
symptoms appear which are characteristic of the disease and
never experienced by the patient before, it is known as disease
aggravation. The new symptoms belong to the disease, the patient
is suffering from, and may be found (thus verified) in the practice
of medicine and/or pathology. It means that the medicine given
was inadequate and could not check the progress of disease.
Medicinal Aggravation:
In medicinal aggravation, too, new symptoms appear which
were never experienced by the patient before. But here, the new
symptoms belong to the medicine given and may be found (thus
verified) in the materia medica. The new symptoms are known as
the accessory symptoms of medicine. It means that the medicine
was wrong; and more numerous the new symptoms, the more
wrong was the medicine given.
Please also see Accessory symptoms of medicine.
Homoeopathic Aggravation
§§ 157, 167, 280, 282
Action of a drug which is homoeopathic to the disease
condition; primary action of the remedy in a patient,
Negative phase of Sir Almroth Wright.
If only the already present symptoms become more

intensified after the remedy, this aggravated state is known as the
homoeopathic aggravation. The patient feels better, inspite of it,
and there appears no new symptom what so ever. For example-
delirium stops although the temperature rises. This intensification,
of already present symptoms, is observed within 2, 4, 6, or 8 hours
if the disease be acute in nature, and within 2, 4, 6, 8, or 10 days
if the disease be chronic in nature.
This indicates that the medicine given has been the most
similar one, it will act as the curative medicine, and it should not
be disturbed as long as it acts. The same medicine in the same
potency (better a bit higher) may be repeated, only when at least
one of the disappeared symptoms reappears.
Also, if after the administration of the remedy some such
symptoms appear, which were experienced by the patient ever
before, it may also be known as a homoeopathic aggravation,
and is still better an indication. That is, the remedy will be
acting for long, will almost cure the patient and the dose should
never be disturbed till it acts etc. As for example-re-appearance
of a gonorrheal discharge (suppressed long before) after the
administration of remedy for heart trouble.
§ 157 “a homoeopathically selected remedy (immediately after
ingestion) causes a kind of slight aggravation—”
“It seems, therefore, to the patient to be an aggravation of his
own disease. But it is in reality nothing more than an extremely
similar medicinal disease”.
§ 161 “the so called homoeopathic aggravation or rather the
primary action of the homoeopathic medicine”
§ 280 “The patient..........begins to feel in a mild degree the return

of one or several old original complaints”.
§ 280 This indicates
“an approaching cure.”
“that the vital principle no longer needs to be affected by the
similar medicinal disease in order to lose the sensation of the
natural disease (§ 148)”
“It indicates that the life principle now free from the natural
disease begins to suffer only something of the medicinal disease
hitherto known as homoeopathic aggravation”.
§ 282 “that the doses were altogether too large”
Medicinal Aggravation:
§§ 163, 180, 181, 249 and F.N. to 249 side effects, bad (ill)
effects of drugs; effects of not perfectly appropriate remedies. Accessory
symptoms of medicines (§ 163).
Any new* symptoms, produced after the application of the
remedy, is a proof that the medicine given is wrong. More new
symptoms, more wrong is the medicine.
If the new symptoms be serious in nature, it is antidoted
at once. If not, we wait till the symptoms pass away, and select
a better medicine. Or—the new symptoms are added to the
totality of symptoms and a more similar remedy (covering all the
symptoms—original and new) is given.
That it is a medicinal aggravation, and not a disease
aggravation, may be verified by looking into the materia medica
* Never experienced before by the patient.

under the medicine given. If the new symptoms are seen to be

there, it has been a medicinal aggravation, and not otherwise.
Aim: § 1
Duty; Calling; rule of practice, object of life; mission.
Various persons have translated the same word ‘Beruf ’
(German) of § 1 differently. But because R.E. Dudgeon rendered
it as mission (in the 5th Edition) and Wm. Boericke retained the
same word in the 6th. Edition’s translation, a misconception has
arisen. That, it has something to do with religion. It is wrong.
The actual sentence (§ 1) reads like this: “Des Arztes hoechster
und einziger Beruf ist, Kranke Menschen gesund zu machen, was
man Heilen nennt.”
Translated literally, it means; The physician’s highest and
only work (professional work, task, or deed) is to make diseased
persons healthy, to heal (cure) as it is known.
The spirit of the word Beruf may mean anything (literally
it means profession), but never related in any way to religion.
Perhaps R.E. Dudgeon too wanted to mean by the word mission
nothing but noble profession, of an assigned task or the object of
life; but never a religious or missionary work.
Even the english word mission does not solely mean religious
work, it also means ‘assigned task’, ‘duty undertaken’ etc.
Further C.E. Wheeler rendered it as ‘aim’. His comment on
the very topic is,— “Homoeopathy is no religion, but a rule of
practice.”
Conrad Wesselhoeft rendered the very word as calling. C.A.

Baldwin too chose calling. Lastly J.T. Kent’s comment on the
topic is simple and decisive:
“The whole aim of homoeopathy is to cure.”
Allgemeine homoeopathische Zeitung (Gn):

Introduction
General homoeopathic journal.
Alloia (Gk):
Dissimilar
Please see page 25
Alloeopathy (Allopathy) (Gk):
Treatment by dissimilar medicines.
Please see page 25
Allowable Non-Homoeopathic (Undynamic) Medicines:
F. N. to § 67, § 291, and F.N. to the last section (§318) of the
1st Edn.
Apart from the F.N. to §67 and §291 of the 6th Edition,
where antipathic measures are shown to be necessary under special
circumstances, the F. N. to §318 of the 1st Edition (1810) reads
as below:
“Besides the homoeopathic method, the rational physician
will very seldom have occasion to employ that revolutionary
plan of evacuations upwards and downwards except when quite
indigestible or foreign or hurtful substances have been taken
into the stomach or bowels. Sometimes the employment of some
undynamic remedies is needful. Such as fatty matters, which

mechanically or physically loosen the connection and compactness
of the fibres: tannin, which solidifies the living fibres as much as it
does the dead fibres; charcoal which diminishes the bad smell of
unhealthy parts in the living body, just as it destroys that of dead
things; chalk, alkalies, soap and sulphur which can chemically
decompose, neutralise and render innocuous the corrosive acids
and metallic salts in or on the human body; acids and alkalies
which are able to dissolve different kinds of urinary calculi in
the bladder; the physically destructive red hot iron, chemical
escharotics of various sorts etc.”
ALTERANTIA (Ln)
Please see page 13
Alternating Diseases: §§ 231, 232
More than one intermittent disease.
If there be more than one intermittent disease of non-febrile
type, these are collectively known as alternating diseases. Since,
each disease condition alternates with the other, repeatedly.
The group, of two or three different disease conditions, repeats
itself in cyclic order. Such as, migraine alternating with sciatica;
or inveterate skin eruption, asthmatic breathing and piles (or
haemorrhoids) coming one after the other in cyclic order.
These are generally psoric in origin, but may be, sometimes
mixed with venereal miasm. Alternating disease conditions are
supposed to be one disease condition (that is all the signs and
symptoms are to be put together) and treated accordingly. These
being chronic diseases need only antipsoric medicines. But
sometimes, where necessary, these may also need antisyphilitic
(or antisycotic) medicines. Also, to break the intermittent
type (or periodicity), a dose of cinchona may have to be given

intercurrently.
§ 231*, “Certain morbid states alternate at uncertain intervals
with morbid states of a different kind”.
§ 232, “These latter, alternating diseases, are also very
numerous, but all belong to the class of chronic diseases.”
“Two or three states may alternate with one another. Thus,
for instance, in the case of double alternating diseases, certain
pains may occur persistently in the legs etc., immediately on the
disappearance of a kind of ophthalmic, which latter again appears
as soon as the pain in the limbs has gone off for the time”.
Amara: (L) Introduction
Bitters, bitter principles; substances which make things bitter
in taste.
Anamnesis (Gk):
(1) Cause of Disease
“So much depends upon a knowledge of the cause (Anamnesis)
of disease, that without it the choice of homoeopathic remedy
cannot be made with safety”.
Aphorisms of Hippocrates, VII, 12
(2) ‘ The past history of a disease’
Goulds Medical Dictionary.
The contradiction in the two different meanings of Anamnesis
is only apparent. Actually, the causes of the present disease
condition lie mostly, in the ‘past history of the individual. The
past history includes not only the inherited stigmata and acquired
dyscrasias of diseases, but the side effects (ill effects) of the drugs
used, also professional and occupational hazards experienced,
not even excluding the various other environmental influences,
affecting the body and mind.
Again the peculiarities of the healthy state of the individual
also belong to the anamnesis (§§ 90, 235). Since only after
ascertaining healthy state of the subject (patient), distinct from
the diseased state, “the physician clearly perceives what is to be
cured in disease, that is to say, in each individual, case of disease”.
Antipathic Medicine: Palliative Medicine

See pages 14
Antipathy:
Enantiopathy; palliative medicine.
See pages 14
14 Aphorism:
§; section; chapter; paragraph
Aphrodisiaca:
Aphrodisiacs
See pages 25
APPROACHES
Clinical Approach: §§ 6, 7, 8, 12, 14, 17, 18
Bedside approach; phenomenological approach
Hippocrates introduced it for the first time.
He said that the art of clinical observation should be the
necessary basis for pathological diagnosis. Without examining
the patient at the bedside, it can never be ascertained, what the
patient is suffering from. Also, only the phenomena (signs and
symptoms) elicited from the patient can be the true guide to
diagnose the abnormality.
Hahnemann went ahead and completed the idea. He said,
for all practical purposes, the totality of symptoms is the only
guide, the true guide. Also, the totality of symptoms is not only
responsible for diagnosis, it is responsible for the remedy too.
And the only scientific practice of medicine is that which uses
the medicine indicated by the totality of symptoms.**
“Hahnemann, the experimenter, discovered the symptomatic
source of both pathological and therapeutic diagnosis and thereby
made the practice of medicine scientific”.
J. Krauss
** As for example —A person is diagnosed to be suffering from diabetes

mellitus. Because, he has frequent thirst and urination, prostration,
burning all over, loss of weight along with high blood sugar etc. But to
treat him with any medicine will be arbitrary and unscientific. But if
the patient has also, fear of death, aggravation between 12 hrs and 14
hrs, is chilly, and burning and chilliness are ameliorated by covering,
the medicine required to cure him is indicated through the totality of
symptoms. To treat him with that particular medicine only will be the
scientific practice and nothing else. This is clinical approach.
Any sign or symptom is a phenomenon. Hence, the

phenomena or the signs and symptoms, are the only guides
to a physician for all practical purposes; pathological and
therapeutic diagnoses, preventive and hygienic measures etc.
Therefore—the bed side or clinical approach is also known as
the phenomenological approach.
Holistic Approach: §§189—193, 9—16
Or, Wholistic approach. Hahnemann’s one of many innovations.
A living man is a whole man always. Be in health or not, the
man is reacting to, and adjusting with, the external and internal
stimuli, as a whole. The body, the mind and the principle, which
makes the body a living body, are wonderfully and inseparably
combined together. They are one and the same. There is not
a single speck of matter which is distinct or separate from the
whole man, of which the whole body is not conscious, for which
the whole body does not work, to which the whole body is not
sympathetic.
Physiology, for example, should teach us this grand truth, if
anything, or rather before anything. The same circulatory system
supplies the most essential substances to each of the smallest
possible units, and is also taking back the unwanted effete matters
from each of them, simultaneously. The same nervous system is
intimately related with, and is constantly conscious of the smallest
possible part of the whole. Every speck of ‘matter’ is, therefore,
a mentalised matter, in every living man, normal or abnormal.
In other words, if we touch a very small amount of potassium
cyanide to the tongue of a man, do we not do something for the
whole man?
This is what Hahnemann meant by the Vital Principle,

‘the dynamic action and reaction.’ To distinguish the dynamic
action and dynamic reactions, which are only observed within
and by the living bodies, from the actions and reactions between
inanimate substances, Hahnemann introduced ‘Vital force’ or
‘Vital principle’ into his Organon. This is the reason, why he says,
‘there can never be a local disease.’ A disease-condition, however
small its manifestation (expression) might be the disease of the
whole man.
The holistic approach is, therefore, the philosophy of
understanding the man as a whole always.
Individualistic Approach:
§§3, 118, 82, 83 etc. and Introduction. Each person is a new person,
and different from the rest of the mankind.
Nature never uses the same mould twice. No two men are,
therefore, exactly the same in all respects. Naturally, there is no
guarantee, that the measures taken for one will serve the same
purpose of the other, The Organon of the healing art is based upon
this philosophy. Individualisation may be said to be the basis and
essence of the system of medicine propounded in the Organon.
He says in the very Introduction, F.N. 2,—“without the most
minute individualisation, homoeopathy is not conceivable.”
And in the text too we see the same idea predominating and
characterising his healing art. This individualising process,
beginning from the knowledge of disease (§ 3), through taking
up of a case (§ § 82, 83, 84) and proving of drugs (§118) to
selection of the most similar remedy for each case, is the hub,
around which the art of healing revolves.
Please also see Individualisation
Art: Introduction and elsewhere

The utilisation of any verified or verifiable knowledge the
practice or utilisation of any organised or systematised idea;
the practical demonstration of any theory, or hypothesis, or
generalisation.
“Art is practice, guided by correct principles in the use of
means for the attainment of a desired end” S. Close
Art of Healing: Title page
The name of the book, actually, is Organon of the healing
art (or, organon of the art of healing). R.E. Dudgeon shortened
the name, for convenience, as Organon of Medicine. Also, this
name (Organon der Heilkunst) is being continued from the 2nd.
Edition onwards. The name of the book, which appeared in 1810,
as the 1st. Edition, was ‘Organon of the rational healing science’
(Organon der rationellen Heilkunde). He deleted both rational
and science and used art from 2nd. Edition to the last edition.
The reasons are shown on page 3.
Art and Science:
“Art and science are inseparably bound together. Every art has
its foundation in science, and every science finds its expression
in art”. S. Close.
Artificial Disease: §§ 105-145
Drug disease; any change (deviation of health) induced
(produced) by a drug; changes seen in the proving of drugs and
in poisonings; also in addictions; primary action effects produced
in the human beings.
Artificial Chronic Disease: §§ 74, 75, 76, 41
Artificially produced diseased state of chronic nature; a

complicated disease-condition, resulting from the admixture of
the abuse of drugs and the disease for which the drugs are used.
The medicine, which does not cure, must injure. The repetition
of it, since it cannot cure, is further damaging. Consequently the
disease, for which the drugs are given, especially in stronger and
repeated doses, becomes complicated. And an incurable disease
condition is the result, through “faulty organic alteration here
and there in the interior or the exterior.” (§ 74)
Such disease conditions—“are of all chronic diseases the most
deplorable, the most incurable.”
§ 75 Most deplorable, because the physician, instead of curing,
has produced such an incurable disease-condition. Most
incurable because of the structural changes developing
in the process, “in order to preserve the organism from
complete destruction of life”
To be able to cure such a disease-condition it requires both
time and patience. And one has to attend to the following rules;
1. To wait, till some effects of drugs go away, if any;
2. To antidote the drugs used; and
3. To treat the natural disease, according to the picture, before
it was mishandled; or
4. To treat the totality of symptoms, now available. For success,
but, it requires enough vitality still left in the individual,
since it “must be remedied by vital force itself.”
Attributes of a Physician: §§ 3, 4, 6, 83, 98
Requisites of an ideal physician; necessary qualifications of a
physician, who may be called a true practitioner of the healing
art and a judicial and rational physician cum preserver of health.
To be able to cure each case radically, to keep every one healthy

and to prevent people from falling ill, a physician should know —
1. What is curable in disease in general and in each
individual case in particular;
2. what is curative in drugs in general and each
individual drug in particular;
§3 3. how to apply, with distinct reason, what is curative
in drugs to what is curable in disease in each case;
4. the exact mode of preparation of each medicinal
substance;
5. its proper dose in each case;
6. the proper period of repetition in each case;
7. the obstacles to recovery, if any, and how to remove
them;
§4 8. how to keep each person healthy, and
9. how to prevent persons from falling ill.
He should also have
§§ 6,83 10. no prejudice;
§ 83 11. sound senses.
§ 98 12. especial circumspection.
13. tact.
14. knowledge of human nature [psychology],
15. caution in conducting the inquiry, and
16. patience.
Aude Sapere: Title page
See pages 1 and 2
Autenrieth’s Salve:
See page 25
BASIS: Introduction
See page 25
BATHS: § 291
One of the three auxilliary helps, other than the therapy. The
other two are: animal magnetism (mesmerism) and massage.
Depending upon which type of bath is used, hot (warm)
or cold (cool), it will be either palliative in nature or a curative
one. As for example for a drowned or frozen person, a hot bath
is prescribed along with coffee, to bring back the almost frozen
tissues to activity. This bath would be, naturally, palliative in
nature. Or, in very high temperature, or in hysteric spasms or
in convulsions of an infant, a cold bath is prescribed. It also
will be a palliative measure. On the other hand if a person be
used to catch cold easily, the curative (homoeopathic) measure
will be to prescribe bath, at the beginning, of a bit subnormal
temperature. Then to further lower down the temperature of
the water, gradually, onwards. Slowly the subject’s capabilities
are raised, and he will not be catching cold in winter or in rainy
seasons. Since, he has become used to take cold baths, regularly,
even in winters.
There are other facts too to be considered. These are: the
condition of the patient; the nature of the disease (i.e. in acute
disease or during convalescence after chronic disease); and
whether the baths are taken for an instant (very short period) or
repeatedly, etc.
Lastly, the baths are only mild measures compared to the
medicinal substances. The baths of palliative nature do not have
any adverse effects, as after palliative medicines.
‘Blood-thirsty parisian Physician’: Introduction

This physician is nobody else than Broussais of Paris.
This dig at Broussais appears for the first time in the 5th.
Edition.
R.E. Dudgeon says, “It is remarkable that this ‘blood-thirsty
Parisian physician in the last years of his life expressed himself in
favour of Hahnemann’s system.”
Boenninghausen, von:
Contemporary of Hahnemann and writer of many books.
Most notable amongst these is his Repertory. His innovations
in, and contributions to the system of Homoeopathic medicine
are many. A few of these are: the concomitance of symptoms, the
need of adding the peculiarities of the individual during health
to the existing disease state; evaluation of symptoms and of the
medicines, etc.
His ideas were so original and valuable that Hahnemann
acknowledges these and gratefully mentions his name twice in
the organon (F.N. to §§ 235/153)
Brunnow, von:
von Brunnow translated the 2nd. Edition of Organon into
French, and wrote an Introduction to the book explaining the
system of Homoeopathic medicine. This Introduction by von
Brunnow was a valuable one and Hahnemann acknowledged it
in the Preface to the 3rd. Edition of Organon.
Bulletin des Societ. Medicales,
Publie’ par les Membres du-comite’ etc. (Fr.)
Bulletin of the medical society, published by the members of
the Central Committee of the medical society, of the department
of the Eure.
Cardialgia Atqoe Alia symptomata (L):

Pains of the heart and other symptoms.
Causa chronicorum morborum (L)
See page 25
Causa chronicorum morborum (non vene reorum) (L)
See page 28
Causa Morbi (L)
See page 26
Causa Occasionalis (L) § 7
Occasional causes;
the exciting and / or maintaining causes.
Any one of these may occasion disease condition, hence so
named. If the cause be removed, the disease condition disappears
spontaneously, provided there is no fundamental (chronic,
miasmatic) cause present.
Causa Prima (L): Introduction
Prime cause; also see page 26
Causam Tolle (L): Introduction
Remove the cause; also see page 28
Causation, Law of
Please see ‘Law of causation’.
CAUSE:
Exciting Cause: §§ 5, 75
A cause which excites a disease condition, hence so named.
Cause of acute or transient or self-limited disease condition;
also, which may bring a chronic disease condition to surface. The
relative importance of an exciting cause is dependent upon and is
modified by the fundamental causes (stated in §§78-80), if any,
and the accessory circumstances (stated in § 5).
Hahnemann describes the following 4 types of exciting causes
in § 73.
Individual 1. Want of optimum hygienic conditions (e.g.
excess or insufficience in food or sleep or rest
etc);
2. physical and mental irritations, which bring
a latent chronic disease to surface (acute
exacerbation of a chronic disease);
Collective 3. meteoric (climatic i.e. physical forces) and
telluric (physical substances e.g. water, soil)
influences, and
4. acute miasms; and these are again the inevitable
result of “calamities of war, inundations and
famine”
As Hahnemann was more concerned all along with the
miasmatic diseases, both acute and chronic, so J.T. Kent too
named the last factor, the acute miasms, as the real exciting causes.
He says, in Lecture V.
“Little is known of the real exciting causes. Acute affections

are divided into 2 classes,:
1. those that are miasmatic, which are true diseases and
2. those that may be called mimicking sickness.
The latter have no definite cause, are produced by external
causes, such as living in damp houses, grief, bad clothing etc, and
the causes being removed the patient recovers. But the first, the
acute miasms have a distinct course to run. They have a prodromal
period, a period of progress and a period of decline, if not so severe
as to cause the patient’s death. Measles, Scarlet fever, Whooping
cough Small pox etc, are examples of acute miasmatic diseases.
Kent wants to emphasize that, as the chronic miasms
(fundamental causes) are responsible for the true chronic diseases
(or chronic diseases proper) so also the acute miasms (the exciting
causes) are responsible for the true acute diseases (or acute diseases
proper).
Fundamental Causes:
§§ 5, 72, 78, 79, 80, 204, 206
The chronic miasms’—Psora, Syphilis and Gonorrhoea
(sycosis); causes of chronic diseases proper—psora group of
diseases, syphilis and sycosis (gonorrhoea). For want of better
nomenclature at that time, Hahnemann gave the causes (the
miasms) the same name as of the diseases these produced, e.g. the
miasm of syphilis (syphilitic miasm) responsible for the disease
syphilis; the sycotic miasm (gonorrhoeal miasm) responsible
for the disease sycosis proper (the specific gonorrhoea); also the
miasms of psora (the psoric miasms) producer of the psoric disease
conditions. The acute miasms too were given the same names,
as of the diseases each one produced, e.g. the cholera miasm, the
plague miasm etc. responsible for the diseases cholera and plague
respectively.
§ 5, “Useful to the physician in assisting him to cure are the
particulars of............the most significant points in the whole
history of the chronic disease to enable him to discover its
fundamental cause, which is generally due to a chronic miasm.”
§ 72, “these are termed chronic diseases. They are caused by
infection with a chronic miasm”.
§ 78,—“The true natural chronic diseases are those that arise
from a chronic miasm.”
In § 79, Hahnemann names the miasm of syphilis and sycosis
(gonorrhoea) to be responsible for (causes of ) the diseases syphilis
and sycosis (gonorrhoea) respectively.
§ 80, “Incalculably greater and more important than the
two chronic miasms just named [syphilis and sycosis], however,
is the chronic miasm of psora, which.................does also, after
the completion of the internal infection of the whole organism,
announce by a peculiar cutaneous eruption............. the monstrous
internal chronic miasm, the psora, the only real fundamental
cause and producer of all the other numerous forms of disease,
which,............figure in systematic works on pathology as peculiar
independent disease.”
As soon as any one of the three miasms of chronic nature
(fundamental causes) has infected the whole man, this internally
and thoroughly infected economy becomes the producer of all
the signs and symptoms, characteristics of the disease process.
§204 “Most the remainder of chronic diseases, result from

the development of these three chronic miasms internal syphilis,
internal sycosis, but chiefly.................internal psora, each of
which was already in possession of the whole organism and had
penetrated it in all directions before the appearance of the primary,
vicarious local symptom of each of them (in the case of psora
the scabious eruption, in syphilis the chancre or the bubo, and
in sycosis the condylomata) that prevented their outburst” etc.
Please also see pages 29-34
Maintaining Cause: § 77, F.N. to § 7
Any “Avoidable noxious influence”, which causes a false or
pseudo-chronic disease. This when removed leaves the person
in good health, “provided no chronic miasm lurks in the body”.
F.N. § 7
Please see False chronic disease
Prime Cause:
Main cause; first cause.
Also see page 6
Proximate Cause:
Immediate Cause, nearest cause.
A cause which is directly responsible for the disease.
Secondary Cause: §§117, 30
Cause other than the first, primary or main cause; the necessary
conditions for the action of the prime cause.
“The cause of Tuberculosis is the tubercle bacillus. The
necessary conditions for (secondary causes of ) the action of the
bacillus are the peculiar bodily constitution, predisposition,

susceptibility and environment of the patient. Without these
concomitant conditions or causes no one would ever have
tuberculosis”.
Stuart Close
Cessat Effectus Cessat Causa (L):
§§ 7, 17, 6, 8, 12 etc.
One of Hahnemann’s many innovations.
Literally translated, the phrase means: if the effects cease
the causes cease too. That is, if the totality of symptoms (effect/
disease) be removed the cause of it too is removed in the process.
This has been well explained in § 17, also in other sections shown
above.
It goes without saying that the ascertained cause of disease,
if any, should always be removed. But what should or could a
physician do, if there be no ascertainable cause of a given disease
condition? Here, the physician has only to remove the totality
of symptoms; he will have, thereby, removed the cause of the
disease too.
“It is impossible to know all the antecedents causative of
disease consequents. Tolle causam is easier said than done. How,
then, shall we remove or palliate these effects by medicinal
substances? Here, Hahnemann steps in to say for the first time
in all history: Remove the effects and you remove the disease, the
cause of the effects. Cessat effectus cessat causa”.
J. Krauss
Chronic Diseases: §§ 5, 76-80

True, natural or proper chronic diseases
(1) Diseases, caused by miasms (fundamental causes) chronic
in nature. These are, psoric group of diseases (Leprosy, Scabies,
Itch, Tuberculosis etc)., Syphilis and Sycosis (Gonorrhoea).
Any disease condition, because it is continuing for long, is not
necessarily a chronic disease. To be a chronic disease, according
to Hahnemann, it should be produced by a chronic miasm.
Again, even if newly produced, it is a chronic disease, if it has
been produced by a chronic miasm. Lastly, miasms have been
classified into acute or chronic, because of the nature of the disease
each one produces. Hence the disease-conditions, produced by
acute miasms are self limited by nature. And these end either in
death or in spontaneous recovery within a specific period, if left
untreated. Where as the disease condition produced by any of the
chronic miasms, is destined to continue to the end of one’s life, is
limitless in nature, and continues through the next generations, if
left untreated. The limitless continuity (chronicity) is the reason
why some of the miasms have been named as chronic miasms.
(II) The last of the three main works, on ‘pure effects of
medicinal substances’ of Hahnemann, containing provings
of 99 drugs The first part of ‘The Chronic Diseases’ contains
Hahnemann’s theoretical exposition of the ‘peculiar nature of the
chronic diseases and their Homoeopathic cure’ and remaining
4 parts contain the provings. The full name of the work is ‘The
chronic diseases, their peculiar nature and their Homoeopathic
Cure”. It began to be published in 1828, and continued till 1838.
The earlier two works were;
(i) ‘Fragmenta de viribus medica mentorum positivis sive in

sano corpore humano observatis, in Latin. It was published in
1805 and contained provings of 27 drugs.
(ii) Reine Arzneimittellehre, in German, It was published in 6
volumes, from 1811 till 1821, and contained provings of 67 drugs.
Chronische Krankheiten (Gn): Chronic Diseases (Die
chronischen Krankheiten) (Gn):
(The Chronic Diseases).
COMMENTATIO de ARTHRITIDE TAM:
Tartarea, quam scorbutica, seupodagra et scorbuto (L)
Remarks on arthritis as well as Tartaric or scurvy as on padagra
cum scurvy.
Complex Disease: § 40, F.N. to § 40
Or a double complex disease; a mixture of two or more natural
diseases, chronic and dissimilar in nature.
Dissimilar diseases do not remove or cure one another.
Moreover, if they be chronic diseases, none will leave the subject
ever. They remain together selecting the parts according to each
one’s affinity. Lastly these get united (more so, if complicated with
non-homoeopathic drugs) and form complex disease-conditions,
difficult to cure. § 40 “Thus a syphilitic patient may become
psoric, and vice versa. As two diseases dissimilar to each other, they
cannot remove, cannot cure one another.............in course of time,
however (as the syphilis is at least as strong as the psora), the two
join together, that is each involves those parts of the organism
only which are most adapted for it, and the patient is thereby
more diseased and more difficult to cure”.
F.N. § 40.........“their cure will be completely effected by a

judicious alternation of the best mercurial preparation, with the
remedies specific for the psora, each given in the most suitable
dose and form”.
Above ‘alternation’ does not mean that the medicines (for
both the miasmatic diseases) are to be given daily or alternately;
instead only one medicine is to be given at first, and after one
condition has been subdued the other is to be given for the
remaining disease condition
Concomitants: (concomitant symptoms)
An innovation of von Boenninghausen. Con (along with)
comitant (present), means, symptoms also present along with
the disease symptoms.
“The word concomitant means existing or occuring together;
attendant”.
H. A. Roberts
In each case (totality of symptoms) we find two distinct
groups of symptom, typical and atypical. Typical symptoms are
characteristic of disease and the atypical symptoms are also present
with the typical symptoms and vary from person to person. These
atypical symptoms are the symptoms which give individuality to
each case. And these are the ‘strange, uncommon, peculiar, rare’
symptoms which have been named by Boenninghausen as the
concomitants. These help us understand in which way a particular
person has reacted to the disease producing force or forces. (§153)
Again—it is of import that a concomitant should not
necessarily be present at the same time. It may also be observed
before or after, only related with the typical symptoms. Further—a
concomitant does not have to be a symptom or sign, even a

modality may act as a concomitant. Also—the inter-relationship
of symptoms to each other (as to time, place and circumstance)
may play the part of individualising a case.
Condition of cure: Preface to the 5th (also the 6th) Edition.
“Homoeopathy knows that a cure can only take place by the
reaction of the vital force against the rightly chosen remedy that
has been ingested, and that the cure will be certain and rapid in
proportion to, the strength with which the vital force still prevails
in the patient”.
Constitution:
“Constitution is that aggregate of hereditary characters,
influenced more or less by environment, which determines the
individual’s reaction, successful or unsuccessful, to the stress of
environment.”
S. Close
Constitutional Diagnosis: §§ 5, 90, 232, 3
To assess the peculiarities of an individual during his or her
healthy state.
The peculiarities of each individual are put together and
assessed in three ways. These are: actual constitutional diagnosis,
developmental constitutional diagnosis and environmental
constitutional diagnosis
The actual constitutional diagnosis is done by observing
the peculiarities of the individual during his healthy state, to be
compared with the pathological state. Only then, “the physician
clearly perceives what is to be cured in disease that is to say, in

every individual case, of disease”. § 3
§ 5 The developmental constitutional diagnosis is done
by examining and finding out the various etiological factors;
“the most significant points in the whole history of the chronic
disease”.
The environmental constitutional diagnosis is nothing but
the assessment of the modalities, or the individuals characteristic
conditions. That is...how does this person react to his environment,
as to time, place and circumstances?
Constitutional Medicine:
Any and every antipsoric medicines are constitutional
medicines. A constitutional medicine corrects the constitutional
defects, inherent and acquired. A constitutional medicine acts
best only after other miasmatic effects are removed or brought
to latent state,
Contra-indications of Medicine: F.N. to § 213
Each medicine has its own characteristic temperament. If
a patient has just the contrary mood to that of the medicine
chosen, the medicine becomes contraindicated, i.e. the medicine
is not, perhaps, the right one. “Thus Aconite will seldom or never
effect either a rapid or permanent cure in a patient of a quiet,
calm, equable disposition, and just as little will Nux Vomica
be serviceable where the disposition is mild and phlegmatic,
Pulsatilla where it is happy, gay and obstinate, or Ignatia where it
is imperturbable and disposed neither to be frightened nor vexed”.
Corrigentia (L): Corrective Medicine
Please see page 34
Curantur and Curentur:

Please see pages 16-19
De Combustionibus Libellus (L):
A booklet (work) on burns.
De Morborum Epidemicorum (L):
On the epidemic diseases.
De viribus Agaricus Muscarius (L):
On the forces of Agaricus muscarius
Derivatives
Please see p. 34
Description de l’Egypte, tom. 1. (Fr):
Description of the Egypt; part 1.
Die Allopathie, ein Wort der Warnung an Kranke jeder Art
(Gn):
The allopathy, a warning to patients of each type.
Die Homoeopathie (Gn): F.N. to § 8
‘The Homoeopathy’.
A book written by Dr. Hufeland, in which he made the
comment, “Homoeopathy can remove the symptoms but the
disease remains”. As a reply to which Hahnemann introduced
§ 8 and in the footnote to it shows the inherent contradiction
contained in the comment.
Please also see ‘Hufeland’s remark’
Diss qua Corporis Humani Momentanearum

Alterationum Specimina Quaedam Expenduntur (L):
Certain kinds of sudden changes of the human body may be explained
by this.
Diet and Regimen:
§§ 259, 261, 262, 263, F.N. to § 260
§ 259 Since the dose is very small, the physician should see
that the patient avoids everything “from the Diet and Regimen
which can have any medicinal action”, for—any such substance
may neutralise the dose, or stand as an obstacle to cure or even
aggravate the disease-condition.
Hahnemann has given a long list of substances both dietary
and otherwise having medicinal properties in the F.N. to § 260.
It reads;
Diet “Coffee; fine chinese and other herb teas; bear
prepared with medicinal vegetable substances—
liquors made with medicinal spices; all kinds of
punch, spiced chocolate”;
“odorous waters and perfumes of many kinds; strong scented
flowers—tooth powders and essences and perfumed sachets
compounded of drugs” etc.
Regimen Not only that. The patient should also avoid ‘heated
rooms, woollen clothing next to skin: a sedentary
life in close apartments or the frequent indulgence
in more passive exercise (such as riding, driving
or swimming), prolonged suckling, taking a long
siesta in a recumbent posture (in bed) sitting up
long at night, uncleanliness, unnatural debauchery,
enervation by reading obscene books, reading while

lying down, Onanism, or imperfect or suppressed
intercourse in order to prevent conception, subjects
of anger, grief or vexation, a passion for play, over-
exertion of mind or body, dwelling in marshy
districts, damp room, penurious living etc.”
§261 In place of these, “innocent moral and intellectual
recreation, active exercise in the open air, in almost all kinds of
weather (daily walks, slight manual labour), suitable, nutritious,
unmedicinal food and drink etc.” are to be resorted to.
Diagnosis:
The examination of every suffering person to obtain all signs
and symptoms 1) for recognising the disease condition, the person
suffers from and 2) selection of medicine the person requires for
cure is known as diagnosis.
Disease: Introduction & F.N.
There are no diseases, there are only diseased persons:
Introduction: “Diseases which never were anything else than
life altered in its sensations and functions” Since disease-condition
produced by other factors are secondary and of lesser importance.
As also opined by J.T. Kent, C.J. Hempel and others.
“The provings of a miasm upon him [man] as that is what
disease is”
J.H. Allen
What Virchow said much later in his cellular pathology—“It
is nothing but physiology under altered condition” is only
Hahnemann’s definition, the best and the earliest, but in different
words, and Hahnemann’s name not acknowledged.
Dissolvents
See page 39
Dose: A dose entails 4 factors:
(i) The form (particular preparation) of the remedy,
(ii) The exact amount of it.
(iii) The type of vehicle to be used, if any and
(iv) The amount of it,
Please also see posology
Dose, physiological:
“In ordinary usage a physiological dose means a dose of a drug,
empirically selected, or sufficient quantity and strength to produce
definite, pre-determined effect or group of symptoms. Practically
it amounts to the Maximum dose consistent with safety.”
S. Close
Dose, Homoeopathic:
The minimum amount of a medicine having homoeopathicity
to the diseases-condition, enough to excite body reaction is a
homoeopathic dose.
Dose Smallest: § 272
“Such a globule [100 to weigh 1 grain] placed dry upon the
tongue, is one of the smallest dose for a moderate recent case of
illness. Here but few nerves are touched by the medicine.”
Duce Natura (L): Follow nature
See also page 39
Dynamic: F.N. § 11
Introduction; & at very many places
Adjective of Dynamis, related or pertaining to Dynamis.
Duration of A Dose:
§241, In the Fourth Edition § 241 reads as below. “It is the
more necessary to bear this in mind because we do not know with
certainty the precise limits of the duration of the action on the
healthy body of any medicine even when taken in large doses,
still less in the small doses used in Homoeopathy in such diverse
diseases* and in patients with such different constitutions.”
Dynamic Action of Medicine:
Change in vital operation, brought by medicine. Functional
changes effected by medicine; action of medicine other than
purely physical or chemical in nature.
Dynamis (Gk): Introduction;
§§ 13, 15 etc., F.N. to § 11
Vital principle; Life principle; animating principle; Vital
force.
* “From the most acute to the most chronic—because the duration of the
action of a homoeopathic dose of medicine conforms to the duration
of the action of the disease in every case; here in the most acute it is
exhausted in a few hours, whereas the very same dose will need several
weeks to complete its action with most chronic diseases.”
Easily Comprehensible Principles: § 2

The principles to guide a “true practitioner of the healing art”
cum a “preserver of health” should be simple, to be understood
easily. Only that is simple, which is true. Hence, a system of
medicine should be based on natures law, to be true, to be simple,
to be easily understood.
Moreover, he cites hundreds of examples, throughout the
book, to prove that only the homoeopathic system of medicine
is such a simple, easily understandable system of medicine which
is guided, at every step, by nature’s laws, hence eternally true.
“—[Homoeopathy] employs for the cure only those medicines
whose power for altering and deranging (dynamically) the health it
knows accurately, and from these it selects one whose pathogenetic
power (its medicinal disease) is capable of removing the natural
disease in question by similarity (similia similibus), and this it
administers to the patient in simple form, but in rare & minute
doses”—
In the preface to the 6th Edition, Hahnemann says; “Thus
homoeopathy is a simple system of medicine remaining always
fixed in its principles, as in its practice... what is clearly pure in
doctrine and practice should be self-evident.”
Eau de Gourme (Fr.) F.N, to § 60
Gum Arabic solution
Elias Anthropos (Gk): Introduction
For the transliteration and translation of all the greek texts.
Please See page 38
Emotional Diseases:
§§ 210—230, and the foot notes.
Mental diseases; moral maladies; psychological disturbances;
disorders of will, understanding and dispositions. Mental, moral
or emotional diseases are no distinct class by themselves, since
any and every disease always present mental symptoms, more or
less in number. The disorders of mind and disposition present,
like one sided diseases, only one or two symptoms, hence are
more difficult to cure. And these are psoric in origin as all other
one sided diseases are.
Much work has been done, indeed, by many, on the subject,
since Hahnemann. Notable among them are Freud, Jung, Adler,
Ebing etc. Yet, Hahnemann’s classification of mental diseases,
done for the first time ever, remains the most useful one, for the
very practical purposes, to cure. He is the pioneer in this field
since February, 1792, when he took over charge of the mental
asylum in Georgenthal. It is he, who introduced the humane and
humanitarian outlook towards the insane and maniacs. And his
are the directions, which are yet to be improved upon, although
remain to be appreciated and utilised to the full even to-day, after
about two hundred years.
Regarding the keeping and management of the mental cases
he says, as “auxiliary mental regimen”, Chaining or tortures of
any kind, physical or mental, should be completely avoided.
Since more a physician fails to cure, more he is forced to take
such torturous steps; (incidentally, what are electric shocks and
strong hypnotics, in the name of ‘modern treatment’)? What these
pitiable conditions need most is care.
The caretakers and keepers should behave with these helpless

people as decently as with sane persons or with persons suffering
from any other disease. The patients should never be rebuked
for their acts; they should never feel that they are being ignored;
rather “the physician and keeper must always pretend to beliefs them
to be possessed of reason.” If the patients ever come to know that
they were deceived, their cases become further damaged.
They should be heard with attention; “to furious mania
we must oppose calm intrepidity and cool, firm resolution”; to
lamentations—an expression of sympathy is the need; “to senseless
chattering—a silence, not wholly inattentive” is required; to
disgusting and obscene conduct or speech total inattention is
needed; to prevent destruction and injury—every thing should
be kept out of reach of the patient.
The only place where force could be justified, is in the taking
of the medicine. Here too compulsion is avoidable, because
homoeopathic medicines may be given without the knowledge
of the patient, the medicines being tasteless and small (e.g. with
drinks).
Hahnemann arranged all the types of mental diseases into
four distinct classes (in §§ 216, 221, 224, 225):
(1) Mental disorders which arise out of disappearance of some
so called physical disease condition.
§216 As for example: tubercular abscess of lung or fistula or psoas
abscess, serious in nature and threatening to be fatal,
transforms into mania.
As the physical symptoms decrease in intensity and disappear,
the mental symptom increases in intensity. Finally the physical
disease loses all its danger and a fully formed mental disorder is
the result.
Caution These maniacs should never be given psychiatric helps
e.g. consolation, advice, persuation etc. Because—such measures
are always harmful to this type of patients, and the disease is
aggravated always. These are the most valuable observation and
direction given by anyone ever.
§§ 217, 218 The curative treatment consists, primarily, in these
cases, in bringing back the physical disease condition. To
do it, all the signs and symptoms of the ‘corporeal morbid
symptoms’ as also the ‘mental and emotional state’ should
be put together. Only the medicine most similar to this
complete picture can bring the patient back to health.
(2) §§ 221 Insanity suddenly brought in a person by an
exciting factor of psychological nature, and looking like
an acute disease. It is only an acute exacerbation of the
chronic disease, which was already there, only in latent
state. The exciting factors for such a condition are either
fright or vexation etc. or abuse of some intoxicating
substance, as for example spirituous liquor, hashhish etc.
Both types of the exciting factors (shock or addiction)
may be termed as trauma.
§ 222 As in any acute exacerbation of a chronic disease, the patient
should always be treated, at first, by an acute medicine.
Such as—‘aconite, belladonna, stramonium, hyoscyamus,
mercury etc.’ But after such a procedure, it should not
be assumed, that the patient is cured. Rather—he should
be treated by antipsoric medicine for radical cure, not
disregarding appropriate diet and regime.
(3)§ 224 The third group consists of such persons, whose mental
disease results from “faults of education, bad practices,
corrupt morals, neglect of the mind, superstition or
ignorance.” If the disease condition did not really result
from disappearance of some physical disease, these cases
would be immensely “improved by sensible friendly
exhortations [discussions], consolatory arguments, serious
representations and sensible advice.” (Whereas cases
resulting from physical disease are further damaged by the
psychiatric measures just stated). This is the field where
the psychiatrists thrive,
(4)§ 225 The last group may be said to be the reverse of the first
group. Here the disease is originated in the mind at first.
It is caused by some emotional cause, “such as continued
anxiety, worry, vexation, wrongs and the frequent
occurrence of great fear and fright.” The continuation for
long of such an abnormal emotional state finally “destroys
corporeal [physical] health, often to a great degree.”
§226 In the very beginning, while the body is not yet diseased, the
cases may be quickly cured by psychiatric measures. “Such
as, a display of confidence, friendly exhortations, sensible
advice, and often by a well-disguised deception.” These
psychical remedies will only help with appropriate diet
and regimen, if the case is recent. The subject would have
to be treated by antipsoric medicines “for security’s sake.”
§ 227 Also, the cases, where the disease has continued for long
and has, therefore, injured the body too, will have to be
treated by antipsoric medicines.’
And —“the vast superiority of the homoeopathic system
over all other conceivable methods of the treatment is nowhere
displayed in a more triumphant light than in mental and

emotional diseases of long standing.”
The words are, and have been verified to be, very true for
about two hundred years.
Environment: §§ 5, 208
Both external and internal factors, or conditions, inseparable
from and along with the man.
“Environment includes social and economic position or
condition of life, as regards means of subsistence, food, clothing,
light, air, housing, neighbours, occupation, mental and physical
conditions and habits of life and thought.”
S. Close.
Please also see Accessory circumstances.
Epidemic Disease: §§ 73,100–102, F.N., §§ 102, 81
Acute specific infectious diseases.
Each epidemic (every time an epidemic appears) is to
be regarded as a new one. According to Sydenham,* whom
Hahnemann quotes in the F. N. to §81, “The candid Sydenham...
insists upon the necessity of not considering any epidemic disease
as having occurred before and treating it in the same way as
another, since all that occur successively, be they ever so numerous,
differ from one another.”
§ 100 But there are exceptions. Only exceptions are “those
epidemics resulting from a contagious principle, that
always remains the same, such as small pox, measles etc.”
* Sydenham’s whole paragraph in Latin, translated by the author, may be

seen on pages 4, 5 in author’s

Translation of all the Non-English Texts in Organon.
That is, such acute specific infectious diseases, which are

seen to occur every year at a particular time period of year,
remain almost the same. These necessarily do not need strict
individualisation as elsewhere This is, incidentally, also true to
the chronic diseases at the beginning.
But an epidemic which is seen after a flood, or a war or a
famine, as also an epidemic (of a similar nature) after quite a few
years, requires a different medicine each time, at least for most
of the cases. After examining a few cases, it is observed that a
particular remedy is being indicated in each case. Indeed after
a few more cases, the same remedy may be seen to be indicated
again; or a better remedy may be found out. This medicine, which
becomes indicated in majority of cases of an epidemic, is known
as the genius of the epidemic or genius epidemicus.
The utilities of this ‘genius epidemicus’ are two fold:
1) individualising, detailed case taking in each case becomes,
unnecessary, the remedy is found out by asking first two
or three questions and
2) the medicine acts as the preventive medicine, for all those
who are not yet affected, for this particular epidemic.
Epidemion (Gk): Introduction.
Epidemic
See page 38
Essence of Introduction: See page 43
Essence of Organon: See at the end of book
Etc. (L) : Short form of etcetera; which means ‘and others’
Et. Seq. (L) : § 80 etc.
The short form of et sequelae, which means, ‘and the

following.’
As for Example: The holistic approach may be seen in §§ 189,
et seq. would mean that the holistic approach may be seen in §
189 and in the following sections (190, 191, 192, 193).
Exactis opii viribus illico Redeunt
Tormina, nec Atrocitatem suam
Remittunt, Nisi dum ab Eodem
Pharmaco Rursus Incantuntur (L): F.N. to § 58
When the effects of Opium is gone, immediately the pains
return, and they lose their atrocity only when controlled again
by the same medicine (i.e. opium).
Examples of Homoeopathy in old school—
See page 35
Excitantia (L)
See page 38
Experiments with Medicine, Hahnemann’s
“.......in the course of about fifty years he experimented with
ninety nine drugs and recorded his observations of their actions
on human body. This record found in his ‘Fragmenta de viribus
medica mentorum positivis,’ Materia Medica Pura, and ‘Chronic
Diseases’ is the largest, the most accurate and the most fertile
of all investigations into medicinal action, made by any single
observer, before or since Hahnemann throughout the annals of
medical history.”
J. Krauss
False Chronic Disease: § 77

Pseudo-chronic disease.
It is not a true chronic disease-condition, although looking
like one. It is produced by an avoidable harmful condition; such
as non—maintenance of hygienic and/or sanitary conditions for
long. Any one of the avoidable harmful condition is also known
as a maintaining cause
A maintaining cause, when removed, leaves the person in good
health, even without the help of medicine. As for example—living
in a damp room, or at a place devoid of sunlight, air etc.
Also, while treating any chronic disease, maintaining causes,
if any should be removed. Since it may stand as an obstacle to
the recovery.
Force: Introduction and throughout the book.
“The failure to make a distinction between power and force,
has always caused confusion. The word ‘force’ generally, as well as
in Organon, is loosely used to express the idea of any operating
or operative power or energy of any active agency or power
tending to change the state of matter; and this is the sense in
which Hahnemann often uses the word in the Organon, when
he speaks of the ‘life force’ as that which acts and is acted upon
in disease and cure.”
S. Close
Therefore it is that Hahnemann uses Vital principle or Life-
principle, instead of Vital force, in the 6th Edition.
Fox Glove: Introduction
Digitalis
Fragments De Viribus Medica mentorum positivis (L): F.N.

to § 109
The full name of the book, written in Latin, is ‘Fragmenta
de viribus medica mentorum positivis, sive in sano corpore
humano observatis.’ The name means — ‘Positive fragments of
the potency (potential action), of medicines, that is observed in
healthy humans.’
The book appeared in 1805. It was the first ever materia
medica prepared by any body, which contained the pure effects of
27 single drugs. Hahnemann’s other two works on materia medica
are ‘Rene Arzneimittellehre’ in German, meaning Materia Medica
Pura and the ‘Chronische Krankheiten’ in German, meaning the
Chronic Diseases. The materia medica pura contained the pure
effects of 67 drugs and the Chronic Diseases contained the pure
effects of 99 drugs.
Genesis: Introduction etc.
Source.
See also page 38
Genius Epidemicus: F.N. to § 102, §§ 100-102
It is a specific for a particular epidemic, at least for most of
the cases. After examining a few cases it is generally observed
that a particular medicine is being indicated in the majority of
cases. Examination of further cases either helps to find a better
remedy or justifies the already indicated medicine to be the genius
epidemicus.
A genius epidemicus, i.e. the mostly indicated drug for a
particular epidemic, may not prove curative for all of the cases
Other drugs may also be indicated for the rest of the cases.
The genius of each epidemic, nevertheless, becomes helpful

in two ways:
1. after a few cases, the physician has to spend much less
time in examining the rest of the patients of a particular
epidemic, and
2. it acts as the best preventive medicine for the people who
are not yet affected.
Please also see Epidemic disease.
Gentle Cure: § 2; F. N. 2, to the Preface to the 6th Edition.
§ 54.
“—homoeopathy avoids everything in the slightest degree
enfeebling.”
Please also see the above stated Foot note to the word
‘enfeebling.’
§ 54 “Without doing injury in another direction and without
weakening the patient.’
Gnothi Seauton (Gk.)* Introduction
Know thyself:
Greek Texts: Introduction
Translation and transliteration of all the Greek Texts may be
seen on pages 38 and 39.
* Please compare the greek texts in the Translation of all the Non-English
Texts in the Organon, by the author, with the transliteration in this book on
the pages 38, 39
Hahnemann, Life of
See pages from 5 to 11.
Hahnemann’s Contribution To Medicine
These are very many. And almost each one of his contributions
is original, revolutionary and epoch making. We name only a few.
(1) Nobody knew, before Hahnemann, the pure effects
of even a single drug. Hahnemann proved 99 drugs. “From
that time [1790] to 1839, that is in the course of about fifty
years, he experimented with ninety nine drugs and recorded his
observations of their actions on the human body. This record,
found in his ‘Fragmenta de Viribus Medica mentorum Positivis’,
‘Materia Medica Pura’ and ‘Chronic Diseases’ is the largest,
the most accurate and the most fertile of all investigations into
medicinal action—made by any single observer, before or since
Hahnemann, throughout the annals of medical history.”
J. Krauss
“In the mere labour of the Materia Medica, Hahnemann’s
own doings are tenfold as great and important as all the labours
of all his predecessors and all his followers.
—In the matter of the Materia Medica, we must all
acknowledge that among them that are born of women there had
not arisen a greater than Samuel Hahnemann.”
R.E. Dudgeon
(2) The totality of symptoms in each case, shows the remedy
required for cure. That is, the symptoms are clues (sources) not
only for disease diagnosis, but also for remedy selection, in each
case.
“Hahnemann, the Experimenter, discovered the symptomatic

source of both pathological and therapeutic diagnosis and thereby
made the practice of medicine scientific.”
J. Krauss
(3) A radical or an ideal cure can only result from
homoeopathicity (similarity) between natural and artificial
disease symptoms. Or, a disease can be cured (in its broadest
possible sense) by that medicine only, which can produce
very similar symptoms in healthy human beings’
“Hahnemann conceived the symptomatic affinity of drugs for
tissues, the symptom-similarity of drugs and tissues, as essential
for the medical treatment of medically curable diseases. If there
was a clear scientific induction from scientific observation, it
was this induction of Hahnemann’s symptom-similarity of drugs
and tissues, which he denominated Homoeopathy, and for the
elucidation of which he wrote his Organon of Medicine.”
J. Krauss
(4) Homoeopathicity (symptom-similarity) between drug
and disease is not, always, enough. Minimum dose is equally an
essential part and parcel of the curative procedure.
“The principle of Similia was of no practical use until the
related principle of potentiation and the minimum dose was
discovered; and that was not until Hahnemann, anticipating by
a hundred years the modern conceptions of matter and force, hit
upon the mathematico—mechanical expedient of preparing the
drug by dilution according to scale in a definite proportion of drug
to inert vehicle. Homoeopathy became practicable at the moment
that discovery was made and not before. But for that, Hahnemann
would have progressed no further than Hippocrates.”
S. Close
“Hahnemann’s first discovery was that the quality of the drug

action is governed by the quantity of the drug used, in inverse
ratio.” S. Close
(5) Just minimising a dose or diluting a drug (medicine) is not
enough. Only through potentisation, according to Hahnemann’s
directions, the properties (capabilities) of a drug can be developed
to the full.
“To Hahnemann alone is due imperishable honour and
renown for discovering......that the specific properties of drugs
could be developed, transmitted and utilised by potentisation.”
Morgan
(6) This process of potentisation makes three great things
possible:
(i) it makes all insoluble substances soluble; e.g. metals (gold,
silver, tin etc.)
(ii) it makes the most virulent poisonous and toxic
substances—animal, chemico-mineral, botanic and
bacterial— great medicines; e.g. (snake venoms, potassium
cyanide, aconite and various germs etc.)
(iii) it turns all inert and non-medicinal substances into great
medicines; e.g. charcoal, sand etc.
Only then it is that hundreds of such substances could be,
and are being, utilised as great medicinal agents.
“If substances are unfit for medicinal action, because they
are insoluble, perhaps they can be made soluble. That idea led
Hahnemann to a technical discovery. He found that insoluble
substances like chalk, flint etc, by a procedure of triturating......
show themselves able to act as medicines on organisms......In
this colloidal dispersion [also molecular solutions] substances

show a great many peculiar properties—he clearly saw that new
properties were developed by this procedure and claimed this to
be his discovery. Indeed, had he not been the founder of a method
of medicine all too advanced and strange for the views of the
conservative majority of his era, he might have been [called] as the
discoverer of colloid chemistry, giving him priority to Graham.
Again, the discovery was the result of very practical motives,
namely to develop the medicinal virtues of insoluble substances.
Otto Leeser
“Hahnemann, by his discovery of potentisation, raised
homoeopathy to a level with other natural sciences. Since he
created for it a method which is analogous to the infinitesimal
calculus of mathematics, upon which is based the atomic theory
of chemistry. It illustrates and harmonises with the ‘theory of the
inter-atomic ether of space’; the theory of the ‘radiant state of
matter, the ‘theory of electric potential’ of present day physics, and
with the chemico-cellular theory of physiology and pathological
anatomy. It agrees with modern bacteriology in its explanation
of the action of pathogenic micro-organisms as being due to the
infinitesimal quantities of their secreted poisons. It is in harmony
with the latest conclusions of modern psychology.”
Ozanam
(7) Hahnemann recognised man as a whole; each man distinct
from the rest of the mankind; due to the presence of Dynamis
every action or reaction in man is dynamic in nature and these are
separate from mere mechanical (physical) and chemical actions
and reactions; every man is a unique combination of the reason
gifted mind, the material body and Dynamis, although separate
entities. To explain all this he introduced the Vital Principle in

Organon, for the most practical purposes.
“To Hahnemann belongs the honour of having been the
first physician to connect Biology and Psychology with Physics
in a practical system of medicinal therapeutics, and to give an
impulse to studies in Biodynamics, which has gained momentum
continuously ever since.”
S. Close
(8) Diseases, or for that matter any occurrence or happening,
is caused by many factors, and most of the time we remain in the
dark as to the causes of a disease condition. Hahnemann found
out and showed the way how to cure each disease-condition
effectively, even if the causes remained unknown.
“It is impossible to know all the antecedents causative of
disease consequents. Tolle Causam is easier said than done.
How, then, shall we remove or palliate these effects by medical
substances? Here Hahnemann steps in to say, for the first time in
all history: Remove the effects and you remove the disease, the
cause of the effects. Cessat effectus cessat causa.”
J. Krauss
(9) Everyone speaks of science and scientificity. But scientific
medicine began, if ever, with Hahnemann. The only medicine,
to be scientific, is that which is indicated through the totality
of symptoms. The administration of any other medicine will be
arbitrary and unscientific. This can only happen (the indicated
medicine can only be recognised) if many drugs are proved
beforehand, their pure effects are observed on heathy human
beings and recorded before beginning treatment. Homoeopathy
insists upon it and follows it. Also, it is based upon fixed and
definite laws of nature.”
“It is beyond all question that it was mainly owing to the
treatment and practice of Hahnemann and his disciples that
the disastrous methods in vogue for centuries to and far into his
time have been abandoned. It remains, however, doubtful if the
allopathic methods of the present day have any greater claim to
scientific character or success than those they have superseded.
Were Hahnemann alive now we can easily imagine how he
would have inveighed against the school medicine of the present
day. The tonic, stimulant, antipyretic and narcotic practice of
modern medicine is as far removed from the scientific simplicity
of homoeopathy, as were the venesections, blisters, cauteries,
purgatives and mercurialisations, against which Hahnemann
waged successful war.”
R. E. Dudgeon
“The era of scientific medical experimentation begins with
Hahnemann and nobody else. —Alert with intellectual power, he
conceived his induction scientifically from scientific observation.
Uncompromisingly scientific for experimental verification, he
verified his induction scientifically for all time on his patients and
made his method of symptom-similarity for all time the central
curative method of scientific medical therapeutics.”
J. Krauss
“Homoeopathy as set forth by Hahnemann, while not perfect,
is complete in all essentials as a system. It is supreme within its
legitimate sphere, because it is the only method of therapeutic
medication, which is based upon a fixed and definite law of
nature.” S. Close
These are only a part of various other Contributions to, and

reforms initiated into, medicine by Hahnemann.
Heilkunde fuer Muetter (Gn): Introduction
Medicine for mothers.
Henbane: Introduction
Hyoscyamus
Hia ta omoia (Gk)*: Introduction
Please see page 38
Homoion Pathos (Gk)*: Introduction
Please see page 38
Homoeopathy: F. N to § 60, preface to the 6th Edition etc.
Homoeopathy, in essence, is similia, simplex minimum.
Similia means; selection of medicine on the basis of symptoms’
similarity.
Simplex means—only one medicine at a time, and minimum
means—the minimum possible amount of medicine capable of
bringing a reaction.
Preface to the 6th Edition;... it [homoeopathy] employs for
the cure ONLY those medicines whose power for altering and
deranging (dynamically) the health it knows accurately, and
from these it selects one whose pathogenetic power (its medicinal
disease) is capable of removing the natural disease in question by
* For transliteration and translation of all the greek texts please see pages 42
and 43. For greek letters, please compare with author’s TRANSLATION.
similarity (similia similibus) and this it administers to the patient

in simple form, but in rare and minute doses.”
“The fundamental principles of homoeopathy are embodied
in a system of doctrines, laws and rules of practice which were first
formulated, named and systematically set forth by Hahnemann
in his Organon of the Art of Healing.
“Subjects such as the ‘life force, the single remedy,
potentiation, infinitesimals, the minimum dose and the totality
of symptoms as a basis for prescription—each of these doctrines
is logically drawn from, and inseparably connected with, the one
fundamental doctrine, which they [homoeopathic physicians]
profess to accept and apply.”
S. Close
Hufeland’s Remark: § 8, F.N. to § 8
In his booklet named ‘The Homoeopathy’
Hufeland had commented, among others, that “Homoeopathy
can remove the symptoms, but the disease remains.”
It is true, that the very comment is a contradiction to itself.
Because, if homoeopathy can remove the symptoms, it can
remove the disease too; since—the symptoms and the disease are
synonymous, are one and the same thing. Hence, the removal of
the symptoms is the removal of the disease.
But, Hufeland was right at the time he made the comment
(1824). It was before Hahnemann had discovered the ‘Nature of
the Chronic Diseases, and their effective cure by Homoeopathy.’
Hahnemann has himself said (in The Chronic Diseases,
Theoretical Part).
“Ever since the years 1816 and 1817; I had been employed,
day and night, to discover the reason why the homoeopathic
remedies, which we then knew, did not effect a cure of the above
named chronic diseases.”
It is only “after unceasing meditation, indefatigable research,
careful observations and the most accurate experiments” for
long 12 years that he discovered the peculiar, miasmatic nature
of the chronic diseases proper and their effective treatment by
Homoeopathy. It is only then, in 1827, that Homoeopathy
came to age, it became mature. Only since then Homoeopathy
has been claiming that Hufeland’s comment is a contradiction
in itself. This is the reason why Hahnemann introduced in the
4th Edition of Organon, in 1829, the §8 as a reply to Hufeland’s
comment, confidently and justifiably.
Further, Hahnemann explains as to the nature of the remark
in the following way:
F. N. to § 8—“This he [Hufeland] maintains partly from
mortification at the progress made by Homoeopathy to benefit
of mankind, partly because he still holds thoroughly material
notions respecting disease” etc.
Ibid (L): Foot notes throughout the book
It means, ‘at the same place.’
Idem (L): Introduction and other places.
(per idem) (L): same (by the same, with the same).
The greek synonym of IDEM is tauton.
Idiosyncrasy (Gk): §§ 116, 117, F. Note to § 117
(Idiosynkrasia) (Gk) Idio means ones’ own, personal; syn-means
with, along with and krasia, crasy means-makeup, constitution.
Although the word itself does not carry the full meaning, yet
it contains the kernel.
Idiosyncrasy is an individual’s constitutional peculiarity to
react to an agent or a stimulus in an abnormal way, while others
of the same community do not react so. This abnormal reaction,
inherited or acquired, to a particular substance may be one of
two types:
1. hyper-excitability (§ 117) and
2. hypo-excitability or non-excitability (§116. last group)
“The fundamental cause of every idiosyncrasy is morphological
imbalance; that is an organic state in which through excess
and defect in development there results excess and defect in
function, with a corresponding degree of hyper-excitability or
non excitability.”
Rice
Idiosyncrasies of hyper-excitable type are more known as
allergies. Yet, the hypo-excitable type of reaction, an equally
abnormal state of an individual, remains to be appreciated in full.
The particular stimulus or agent, to which a person specifically
reacts very strongly, is known as allergen. It may be either of the
4 types:
(a) Ingestant,—substances which are taken in, e.g. drugs;
food, drink etc;
(b) Injectant,—substances which are pricked or injected in,
e.g. drugs or stings etc;
(c) inhalant,—things which are inhaled in, e.g. vapour smells
etc. and
(d) Contactant,—things which act through touch.

Yet, there may be also mental allergies, or idiosyncrasies if you
please, apart from the officially appreciated physical and chemical
ones. Also, there may be certain shade or colour, against which
a person reacts very powerfully. Even a particular moon phase
may act as stimulus. “This is a well-known state of the body or
mind; in fact, we may have either a physical, mental or moral
idiosyncrasy.”
J. H. Allen
Both types of the perverted constitutional get up, hyper and
hypo-excitable, are the results of various factors. But the major
causes are:
(i) Previous abuse of drugs, and
(ii) suppression of disease-conditions, mental or physical.
“Many persons who have been poisoned by a drug are
afterwards hypersensitive to that drug.......a condition known
as anaphylaxis............In such cases the disappearance of the
original external manifestations of the disease is followed by [a
vulnerability] not only to the particular drug concerned, but to the
diseases to which that drug corresponds homoeopathically. They
are illustrations of metastasis, which is........due to a suppression of
the primary form of the disease by injudicious topical or palliative
treatment.”
S. Close
“Often what are known as aggravations and ameliorations are
due to idiosyncrasies. Patients suffering from idiosyncrasy can not
be said to be healthy human beings. They need antimiasmatic
treatment, they need the similia that in their particular case
removes or separates psora, or the tubercular element, or whatever

may lie behind the idiosyncrasy.”
J.H. Allen
Both the types are curable states; since each individual reacting
specifically to a particular substance or stimulus, the condition is
individualised easily, viewed as modality.
Thanks to the hyper-excitable type of persons, since from them
we come to know the medicinal virtues of even apparently non-
medicinal substances. Equally helpful are the non-excitable types,
who reveal the otherwise unascertainable sides of pathogenetic
power of drugs.
During proving, a drug may not produce symptoms (say more
than one or two) in a non-excitable type of person. It is wrong
to surmise that the drug would be useless to him, if he ever fell
ill and exhibited the symptoms produced in other provers. The
drug would be equally effective in him, as in any other person.
Individualisation : §§ 3, 82, 83, 84, 118 F.N. 2 of Introduction;
F.N. to § 81, etc.
It is a philosophy which helps us understand each person
distinct from the rest of the mankind.
Another innovation of Hahnemann. This individualistic
approach of his is the very basis of Organon, of the homoeopathic
system of medicine. It is the hub around which the system
revolves.
No two persons are ever alike, be in health or disease There
is no guarantee, therefore, that a measure helpful to one will be
helpful to the other. For example— a few persons are suffering
from a particular disease condition, say “Pneumonitis.” And every
one’s sputum is seen to have “Pneumococci’’; yet, everyone will

not be cured by the same medicine. Because it is seen that one
is restless, the other is lying still, someone else is thirsty and still
another is thirstless; further—one is very sleepy, the other sleepless;
and another person may be constipated, while the other may have
diarrhoeic state. Even logically it is fallacious to say, a particular
drug will be equally helpful to one and all. On the contrary, a
drug curative for one may be injurious to the other. ‘One man’s
meat may be poison to other.’
In the very Introduction, therefore, we see F.N. 2—
“without the most minute individualisation homoeopathy is not
conceivable.” § 3 begins with—“If the physician clearly perceives
what is to be cured in diseases, that is to say, in every individual
case of disease (knowledge of disease, indication), if he clearly
perceives what is curative in medicines, that is to say, in each
individual medicine (knowledge of medicinal powers) etc, only
then he......is a true practitioner of the healing art.’’ This is only
to individualise both the disease—condition and the medicine
in each case.
To emphasize further, he says, in § 5, “—the ascertainable
physical constitution of the patient (especially when the disease
is chronic), his moral and intellectual character, his occupations,
mode of living and habits, his social and domestic relations, his
age, sexual function, etc., are to be taken into consideration.”
In 5 6,—he says “The unprejudiced observer—notices only
the deviations from the former healthy state of the now diseased
individual, which are felt by the patient himself,” etc.
In § 82—“normal cure of this or of other diseases can not
take place without a strict particular treatment (individualisation)
of each case of disease.”
In §83—”this individualising examination of a case of

disease for which—the practitioner will bear in mind only what
is applicable for each individual case.”
In §84—“He [the physician] writes down accurately all that
the patient and his friends have told him in the very expressions
used by them.”
Lastly, in §118,—’’Every medicine exhibits peculiar actions
on the human frame, which are not produced in exactly the same
manner by another medicinal substance of a different kind.”
Therefore it is that there are—”in a medical point of view,
no equivalent remedies whatever, no surrogates.” in § 119 and its
foot note.
Please also see Individualistic Approach.
Institut Chirurg. (Gn):
Institute of Surgery.
Interpres Clinicus (L): F. N. to § 46
Clinical interpretation.
Isopathy: F.N. to § 56
Please see page 39
Large Doses Required: F. N. § 282
To treat the chronic diseases at the beginning (in their primary
stage) the exception to the general rule should be remembered.
It is necessary that the remedy should be given in large doses,
that is, in lower potencies, and it should be repeated daily, even
a few times daily.
F.N. to § 282 “—a notable exception in the treatment of

the three great miasms while they still effloresce on the skin,
i.e. recently erupted itch, the untouched chancre (on the sexual
organs, labia, mouth or lips and so forth) and the fig warts. These
not only tolerate, but indeed require, from the very beginning
large doses of their specific remedies of ever higher and higher
degrees of dynamisations daily (possibly also several times daily).
—During external manifestations of these miasms—the large dose
withdraws the sensation of the disease from the vital principle
day by day.”
Law of Causation: § 117, 5, 208
No event can ever be effected by a single cause. For any effect
or phenomenon, more than one cause is needed § 117, “For as
two things are required for the production of these as well as all
other morbid alterations in the health of man—to wit,
(a) the inherent power of the influencing substance and
(b) the capability of the vital force that animates the
organism to be influenced by it.”
There are, further, very many environmental factors
influencing every man continuously, without end.
“Every effect has a number of causes, all of which must be
taken into consideration, if correct conclusions are to be formed.”
S. Close
“It is impossible to know all the antecedents causative of the
disease consequents.”
J. Krauss
“The universality of the law of causation consists in this, that

every consequent is connected in this manner with some particular
antecedent, or set of antecedents. Let the fact be what it may, if
it has begun to exist, it was preceded by some fact or facts, with
which it is invariably connected.” ......It is usually between the
consequent and the sum of several antecedents, the concurrence
of all of them being requisite to produce, that is to be certain, of
being followed by the consequent.
“In such cases it is very common to single out one only of
the antecedents under the domination of cause, calling the others
merely conditions......
“The real cause is the whole of these antecedents, and we have
no right, philosophically speaking, to give the name of the cause
to one of them, exclusively of others.”
John Stuart Mill
“Two things thus constitute disease: first the qualities of the
organism, which constitute the conditions for the disease; second,
the external causes of the disease. ...The law of causation teaches
that, an internal effect may in turn become a cause of further
changes.”
S. Close
Laws of Nature:
Homoeopathy is more than the law, or rather the doctrine, of
similia. It appreciates and utilises also other laws of nature. Also,
there are laws, which, being in harmony with the various steps of
Homoeopathic system, explain its scientific procedures. The laws,
appreciated by and clarifying the homoeopathic procedure, are,
1. The law of similia,

Also other laws, related to it, are:
a) Arndt-Schulz’s law, and
b) The laws of repulsion and attraction (positive and
negative poles repel positive and negative poles
respectively etc.)
2. The law of minimum.
The related mathematical law of Maupertius is known as ‘the
law of the least plus’ or ‘the law of the minimum.’
3. The doctrine of Simplex.
For law and order, and to avoid chaos, etc. only one thing is
let to act at a time. (It is observed, that while a disease is in its
active stage, the others, even if present from before, become latent.
This happens as long as there is hope of regaining the health back.
On the contrary, simultaneous activity of all the diseases present,
leads to chaos and disorder, e.g. in cancerous stages). Hence the
need of single remedy at a time.
4. The laws and ways of nature are uniform and harmonious.
Therefore it is that the nature and effect of every substance,
or drug, remain the same, and are dependable.
Other Laws, found out by Newton, Bacon etc. are:
5. Effects follow causes in unbroken succession.
6. Action and reaction are ceaseless, equivalent and
reciprocal.
7. Motion is ceaseless and transformation continuous.
8. Matter is indestructible and infinitely divisible.
9. Force is persistent and indestructible,

10. Apart from these, Homoeopathy believes in and follows
‘the scientific method’, developed out of the ‘Inductive
Method in Reasoning’ of Bacon. It is composed of 4 parts:
(a) exact observation,
(b) correct interpretation,
(c) rational explanation and
(d) scientific construction; mainly for prediction and
actual demonstration.
11. Improvement and cure come from within outward.
It is also described as Hering’s Law of cure, which is:
(a) Symptoms disappear from above downward,
(b) Symptoms disappear from within out ward, (i.e. from
more important to less important organs)
(c) Symptoms disappear in the reverse order of their
appearance; etc.
12. The quality of the action of a curative remedy is
determined by its quantity, in inverse ratio.
Moreover, “—the law of cure as taught by Hahnemann is
not, and cannot be, limited to a small group of conditions, the
limitations rest entirely with our ignorance.”
H. A. Roberts
Lege Artis (L): Introduction
See page 39
Leipziger Literatur zeitung (Gn):
Literary Periodical of Leipzig (L)
“Latet Immensa Virium diversitas F.N. to § 118

in iis ipsis plantis, quarum facies
externas dudum novimus animas
quasi et quodeunque caelestius Albrecht von Haller’s
habent non dum perspeximus.” esteemed opinion.
“There is hidden an immense diversity of forces in even those
plants, whose external faces we know since long, but the souls, so
to say, and whatever celestial they, have, we have not yet looked
through.”
Lettres, Supplement a son Traite des Maladies (Fr.):
Supplement to the treatise on the diseases.
Libell de Stram (L): Introduction
A treatise on Stramonium
The full name would be ‘Libellus de Stramonii’.
Life:
“It is a continuous adjustment of internal to external relations”
S. Close
Life-Principle: Introduction,
and throughout the book §§ 9, 10 et. seq.
Other synonyms are Vital-principle, vital force, life force
etc.
All the adjectives, of vital principle, used at various places,
are only to emphasize that it requires help all along. It requires
help to get rid of the miasmatic diseases (proper chronic diseases
and acute specific infectious diseases) and drug diseases; also for
preventing diseases.
Introduction: The adjectives used at various places are: ‘Crude,
instinctive nature—the unreasoning life-preserving
power—is not guided by reason and reflection. —
this irrational vital force—the unintelligent—the
crude, senseless, automatic vital energy etc.” Other
qualitative adjectives may be seen in the §§9, 10,
11 and else where.
Although it needs help at every step, it is never the less, the
sole and ultimate factor, which is responsible for well-being,
for falling ill, for getting cured and for preventing diseases by
building up defensive mechanism (immunity) against various
disease producing agents etc.
The practical utility of the knowledge about vital principle
consists of the following:
1. It helps us understand a person as a whole;
2. It helps us individualise each person from the rest of the
mankind;
3. It helps us appreciate the dynamic nature of the actions and
reactions, which transcend mere physical and chemical
action, reactions;
4. It helps us appreciate that the moral and psychic sides of a
man are equally, if not more, important than the physical
one, to be able to understand any man fully;
5. It helps us understand the ‘State of being’ of every
human ‘being’ i.e. no state of a living man is static, it is
continuously changing; and it is reacting against, and is
being acted upon by various environmental factors, both

external and internal, endlessly;
6. It helps us interpret precisely any and every little change
in the economy and take appropriate steps accordingly;
7. It helps us explain the curative nature of only the
homoeopathic medicines, although seemingly
contradictory (because of the vitality’s inherent nature
to react against any stimulus external or internal, mental,
or physical), etc.
List of Antipsoric Medicines:
These are fifty, namely:
Agaricus Dulcamara
Alumina Euphorbium
Ammonium Carb Graphites
Ammonium Mur Guaicum
Anacardium Hepar Sulph
Arsenicum Alb Iodine
Aurum Kali Carb
Baryta Carb Lycopodium
Belladonna Magnesium Carb
Bor. Acid Magnesium Mur
Bovista Manganum
Calcarea C Mezereum
Carbo Animalis Muriatic Acid
Carbo Vegetabilis Natrum Carb
Causticum Natrum Mur
Clematis Kali Nit

Colocynth Nitric Acid
Conium Petroleum
Digitalis Phosphorus
Phosphoric Acid Silica
Platinum Stannum
Rhododendron Strontium
Sarsaparilla Sulphur
Senega Sulphuric Acid
Sepia Zincum
Loc. Cit (L): F.N. to § 38 and at many places.

It is the short form of Loco Citato.
It means—at the cited place, or at the already quoted book
or page.
Magazin fuer den neuesten

Zustand der Naturkunde (Gn.): Introduction
Magazine for the latest states of natural sciences.
Male fern root: Introduction
(Filix mas) aspidium
Mania Phthisi Superveniens Eam cum Omnibus Suis
Phaenomenis Auffert Verum mox Redit Phthisis Et occidit,
Abeunte Mania (L): F.N. to § 38
Reil’s observation means:
‘If mania supervenes in phthisis, the mania removes it
(phthisis) with all its phenomena, but as soon as phthisis returns
it kills, while the mania disappears.’
Materia Medica Pura (L): Introduction, F. N. to § 109 etc.
The book appeared in German language as ‘Reine
Arzneimittellehre’, and in 6 volumes. The first volume ‘appeared
in 1811 and the last in 1821. The second ‘augmented’ edition of
it began to appear in 1822 till 1827.
Materia Peccans (L): Introduction, F.N. to § 11 etc.
Obnoxious matter; injurious or harmful material. Neither the
causes of natural or proper or true diseases, acute or chronic, nor
the diseases themselves could ever be material things or matter.
The causes of diseases proper, acute and chronic, are the various
miasms. These, the miasms, are never matters, they are dynamic
in nature.
Again, the diseases, per se, are dynamic changes of the
economy. Also, even if caused by material, mechanical, physical
and chemical agents, the abnormal state of man will be, has to be,
a dynamic state, or altered physiology.
Please also see pages 39 and 40
Medicine: Throughout the book.
Technically, a medicine is a drug;
(a) Which has been prepared according to directions of a
pharmacopoeia and
(b) Which has been proved on healthy human beings and the
effects recorded.
Please also see page 40
Medicin Electrisitat (Fr): Electricity as medicine
Medicinische Annalen (Gn.): F.N. to § 38
Annals of medicine
Memoirs de l’Academie RoyaIe (Fr.): F.N. to Introduction
Memoirs of the Royal Academy.
Memoirs et Observations (L):
Memoirs and observations
Mental Disease: §§ 210-230
See pages 95—100
Mercuralia (L): Introduction
Please see page 40
Mesmerism (animal magnetism)
See at the end of ‘M’.
Metastasis : Direction of disease to other parts
Please compare with Palliation, when the disease remains at

the same place.
Metaschematismen (Gn):
Morbid processes, metastases.
Miasm: (L): Throughout the book
Miasmata (L): The original word is miasma, the plural form of
which is miasmata
Literally, the word meant, upto Hahnemann’s time, many
things; including polluting exhalations, malarial poisons etc. But
since Hahnemann, and because of Hahnemann, the word has
taken much more precise form.
In the very Introduction he says,—F.N. 1—“—the exciting
cause of (non-venereal) chronic diseases to be an infection at one
period or another with the itch miasm (psora)—”
In the table of contents, against § 78, he writes “chronic
diseases proper; they all arise from chronic miasms.”
§72—last line—“—Chronic diseases. They are caused by
infection with a chronic miasm.”
§78—first line—“The true natural” chronic diseases are those that
arise from a chronic miasm.”
§ 79—“Hitherto syphilis alone has been to some extent known
as such a chronic miasmatic disease,—sycosis (the
condylomatous disease)—was not recognised as a chronic
miasmatic disease, which it never the less undoubtedly
is—”
§ 80—’Incalculably greater and more important than the two

chronic miasms just named, however, is the chronic miasm
of psora which—does also, after the completion of the
internal infection of the whole organism, announce by
a peculiar cutaneous eruption, —the monstrous internal
chronic miasm—the psora—”
§ 81 “this extremely ancient infecting agent—”
§ 204 “—Chronic diseases, without exception, result from the
development of these three chronic miasms, internal
syphilis, internal sycosis, but chiefly—internal psora,
each of which was already in possession of the whole
organism, and had penetrated it in all directions before
the appearance of the primary, vicarious local symptom of
each of them (in the case of psora the scabious eruption,
in syphilis the chancre or the bubo, and in sycosis the
condylomata.)—”
In § 206 too, he mentions of the internal ‘infections’ from the
psoric, syphilitic and sycotic miasms, and about the combination
of one with the other, or with the both, the disease condition
becoming thereby more complicated.
In his ‘Chronic Diseases’, he says—
“All chronic diseases are based upon fixed chronic miasms,
which enable their parasitical ramifications to spread through the
human organism and to grow without end.” Also,
“The chronic miasms are semi-vital morbid miasms of a
parasitical nature.” Again —
“on the other hand, are not the chronic miasma’s disease
parasites which continue to live as long as the man seized by
them is alive, and which have their fruit in the eruption originally
produced by them (the itch pustule, chancre and that fig wart,
which, in turn, are capable of infecting others) and which do not
die off of themselves like the acute miasms”—etc.—repeatedly.
Add these words with his description about the acute miasms.
§ 73—“their exciting causes and producers—sometimes they
are peculiar acute miasms—either small pox, measles, whooping
cough, scarlet fever—, the asiatic cholera etc.” Also—these
“generally become infectious (contagious) when they prevail
among thickly congregated masses of human beings”
In his article on Cholera (vide—‘The mode of propagation
of Asiatic Cholera’—in Lesser Writings)—he gives more closer
description of Cholera miasm
“On board ships—in those confined spaces, filled with mouldy
watery vapours, the cholera miasm finds a favourable element for
its multiplication and grows into an enormously increased brood
of those excessively minute, invisible living creatures of which the
contagious matter of the cholera most probably consists.” In the
last line of the same paragraph he repeats “—the cause of this
disease—is composed of probably millions of those miasmatic
animated beings.” He repeats and asserts in the same way quite
a few times afterwards.
While mentioning about the carriers he says, “Thus the
cholera physicians and nurses are the most certain and frequent
propagators and communicators of contagion far and wide.” He
advises further down— “by the cure of the disease with pure
camphor they would at the same time eradicate and annihilate
the miasm (that probably consists of innumerable, invisible living
beings) in and about the patient”—etc.
Are these not enough proofs for the meaning of the word
‘miasm’, at least as far as Hahnemann is concerned? He just
did not mention the word ‘germs’ or ‘bacteria’ because the
words were not prevalent in those days. But his closest
description of them invariably and indubitably proves that
he wanted to mean by ‘miasms’ the very same thing as we
mean today by germs, bacteria, microbes or micro-organisms.
Hahnemann’s above words, regarding miasm, are as clear to
day, as they were then.
Further, it would not be out of place, if—we quoted from a
few authorities on Hahnemann and Homoeopathic literature too.
Richard Haehl (vide ‘Samuel Hahnemann, His Life and
Work’) titles the page no. 179 as “Hahnemann names microbes
as cause.”
“For miasm, read micro organism”—M.L. Tyler in ‘Different
ways of finding the remedy.’
“By miasm, Hahnemann means germ-disease”
Sir John Weir.
in ‘Science and Art of Homoeopathy.’
“He [Hahnemann] is thus granting, IN PRINCIPLE, the
germ-theory of infectious disease, and the propriety of bactericide
treatment in them.”
Richard Hughes,
in The Principles and Practice of Homoeopathy.’
“Hahnemann made a shrewd guess when he suggested the
poison of cholera to be a living parasite, infinitesimally small;
he would have welcomed bacteriology. ......The same is true of
gonorrhoea, of tubercle, probably of other germ diseases (e.g.

Pneumococcus and M. rheumaticus)......For word miasm the
more familiar form infection might be substituted.”
C. E. Wheeler
in ‘The Principle and Practice of Homoeopathy’
“......he [Hahnemann] recognised the presence of bacteria and
attributed to these animal forms, too minute for the eye to see,
many forms of epidemic and acute illnesses;”—etc.
H. A. Roberts, in ‘The principles and art of cure’
“What the pathologists of today call gonorrhoeal infection,
is what we term sycosis.”
J. H. Allen, in ‘The Chronic Miasms.’
“The basic cause of syphilitic mainfestations he called the
miasm ‘Syphilis;’ that of gonorrhoeal sequelae, ‘Sycosis’; that of
chronic diseases (except those due to drugs or poisons) of non-
venereal origin,’Psora’.”
Harvey Farrington, in Homoeopathy and Homoeopathic
Prescribing.
“After nearly one [two] hundred years of serious research in
the laboratory and at the sick-bed, we know that Hahnemann
was quite right, that in reality gonorrhoea and syphilis are totally
different diseases and that their bacteria have nothing at all to do
with one another. Whilst gonorrhoea arises from the gonococcus
discovered by Neisser, the soft chancre is caused by rod-like
bacteria, grouped in chain formation and the virus of the hard
chancre, so-called syphilis, is the spirocheta pallida Schaudinn.”
Richard Haehl
in ‘Samuel Hahnemann, his life and work’ page 140

“These miasms all require a given time to operate before they
can affect the external man, and this time is called the prodromal
stage.
“This is true of psora, syphilis and sycosis and of every acute
contagious disease known to man.”
J.T. Kent, in “Lectures on Homoeopathic Philosophy.”
Lecture V.P. 101
We can go on quoting, but it is hoped that the implications,
along with the meaning, are clear. The essence may be stated by
Stuart Close.
* The cause of tuberculosis is the tubercle bacillus. The
necessary conditions for (secondary causes of ) the action of the
bacillus are the peculiar bodily constitution, predisposition,
susceptibility and environment of the patient. Without these
concomitant conditions or causes no one would ever have
tuberculosis.”
Stuart Close, in ‘Genius of Homoeopathy’ page 10.
A miasm is, according to Hahnemann, and to most of his
followers, an infecting agent and a cause of disease. According to
some, it is also the disease, produced by the miasm.
Minimum Dose: § 283
Since a drug is a foreign substance, the least of it is used, the
better. And any surplus may act as an obstacle, if not injurious.
There is no, there cannot be any, fixed standard of a minimum
dose. Because, “medicines differ so much in power.” And as
Hahnemann says, in the corresponding paragraph in the 1st
Edition,—”The doctrine of the divisibility of matter teaches

us that we cannot make a part so small that it shall cease to be
something, and that it shall not share all the properties of the
whole. If, now, the smallest possible part powerful enough for
the purpose for which you require it, would you employ a great
quantity than you require?”
Again, only the 1st Edition contained the following: §252—
”...it must be given in the smallest possible volume, So as to come
in contact with as few nerves as possible when it is ingested.*”
Minister Naturae:
Please see page 40
Mission : § 1
Duty; Calling; professional task; please also see pages 65, 66
* “Hence the uselessness and impropriety of drinking after taking the dose
which has been purposely made, so small.”
Mesmerism (Animal Magnetism) §§ 288, 289 and the Foot

notes.
One of the four accessory helps, other than the therapeutic
measure.
(The other three are: MAGNET, ELECTRICITY and
BATH).
Very powerful, strong willed persons of good character
are capable of, and have been, curing various types of disease-
conditions, even to the extent of miracles, all along. In the western
world it was begun to be practised by Mesmer, hence the process
is named after him.
Mesmerism, or animal magnetism, is simply to transfer vital
energy from one person to another, with or without touch. It
may be given either at a particular part (organ, system), or to the
depraved whole person. This is known as Positive mesmerism.
Sometimes, it is, also, to distribute uniformly all over the vital
force, accumulated at a particular part (organ system), of a rather
healthy person, who has suddenly become sick. This is known as
Negative mesmerism.
Positive mesmerism may be practised in two ways. Either
through touching the patient, or without touching him altogether.
When the whole man is to be supplied with some vital energy,
he is touched all over, only once. When a particular part is at
fault (generally a local manifestation of a chronic disease, “e.g.
old ulcers, amaurosis, paralysis of a limb etc.) the part is touched
by the palms or tips of the fingers of the mesmeriser. It may be
repeated. Naturally, here, because of the presence of a chronic
disease, indicated homoeopathic medicines too are to be given.
The same results may be had without touching the patient.

It may be achieved by giving a positive pass. A positive pass is
nothing but the flat palms of the mesmeriser, just above the skin,
are passed from “the top of head, over the body to the tips of the
toes, not too slowly,” only once. Too slow would be a very strong
pass which may require “a gentle less rapid negative pass.”
A Negative pass consists of “making a very rapid motion of the
flat extended hands, held parallel to, and about an inch distant
from the body, from the top of the head to the tips of toes. The
more rapidly the pass is made, so much the more effectually will
the discharge be effected.”
It is important to remember that the patient should not have
any piece of silk upon him during taking any pass, positive or
negative.
Further, the mesmeriser has to be a “well intentioned
person” who can “powerfully exert his will.” “The most
powerful sympathetic will of a man in full vigour of vital force”
can do miracles. More effective will be the results, when the
“philanthropic” mesmeriser will have “along with great kindness
of disposition and perfect bodily powers but a very moderate desire
for sexual intercourse.”
Modalities: Environmental Constitutional Diagnosis;
Conditions of aggravation and amelioration put together.
Modalities are the characteristic conditions, in or under which
a person reacts favourably and/or unfavourably. These individual
characteristic conditions are observed both during provings of
drugs and during natural disease-conditions. These are the most
important factors to individualise a case.
“All of these indications (aggravation and ameliorations) are so

trustworthy, and have been verified by such manifold experiences,
that hardly any others can equal them in rank, to say nothing
of surpassing them. But the most valuable fact respecting them
is: That this characteristic is not confined to one or another
symptom, but like a red thread-it runs through all the morbid
symptoms of a given remedy, which are associated with any kind of
pain whatever, or even with a sensation of discomfort, and hence
it is available for both external and internal symptoms of the most
varied character.”
Von Boenninghausen
“Boenninghausen’s grouping of them [modalities] as generals
was a masterpiece of inductive reasoning”
H.A. Roberts
Morbific Noxious Agents: § 31 Introduction and throughout
the book
Disease producing harmful factors.
§ 31 “The inimical force partly psychical partly physical to which
our terrestrial existence is exposed, which are termed
morbific noxious agents, do not possess the power of
morbidly deranging the health of man unconditionally.”
The disease producing factors may be, broadly, any one of
the following types:
Psychic, medicinal, miasmatic and electro-thermic etc. It
would not be out of place to mention that:
(a) nothing acts unconditionally, (§31. and the law that-every
event is conditional,) and
(b) every event requires more than one cause (§117 and the
law of causation.) §§ 5, 208, 117
(c) “Every event in the circle of natural phenomena has a
conditional necessity, since it can only result from its
precedents and depends upon them.”
Stuart Close
“Two things thus constitute disease:
first, the qualities of the Organism, which constitute the
conditions for the disease; Second, the external causes of the
disease........ The law of causation teaches that, no internal effects
can arise without an external cause and that the effects may in
turn become a cause of further changes.”
Stuart Close
Most Similar Medicine: §§ 153, 147, etc.
The simillimum, or the most similar medicine, will be that
which is similar, in all respects, to the disease-condition for which
it is given. For this reason the medicine has to be similar in six
ways to the disease. The six factors are:
1. Seat of action (selective affinity),
2. Kind of action (disease process),
3. Causative modification (modifying conditions),
4. Character of sensation (nature of pain),
5. Concomitance (permutations and combination), and
6. Sequence of symptoms (chronological appearance).
In short, if the artificial disease-producing agent be capable
of selecting the same organs (or systems) of producing the similar
process (progress) of disease, is aggravated and ameliorated in

similar way, has the similar nature of pains and sensations, has
the similar permutation and combination of symptoms and, can
produce the symptoms in the same order as of the disease, it will
be the most similar medicine.
Nachricht von dem Kranken Institut Zu Erlangen (Gn): F.N.
to § 46
News from the Institute for the diseased at Erlangen.
Natural Disease: Introduction and
§§ 73, 78, 30-50.
A natural or proper or true disease is a miasmatic disease.
For precision—all acute specific infectious diseases and Syphilis,
Sycosis (Gonorrhoea) and Psoric group of diseases (Itch, Scabies,
Leprosy, Tuberculosis etc.) are natural or proper or true diseases.
Nature’s Law of Cure: § 26, §§ 45, 46 etc.
Therapeutic Law of nature.
It is defined in the § 26, also discussed in* the §§45, 46 etc.
In short,—to cure a disease condition, the remedy should be
(a) most similar (in manifestations) to the disease-condition
in every respect,
(b) stronger than the disease-condition (i.e. more violent in
acute and more long acting in chronic states), and
(c) different in source or kind (e.g.—a diarrhoeic or choleraic
condition produced by Arsenic will not be cured by
Arsenic, but such a condition produced by anything else
e.g. ptomaine poisoning or comma bacilli etc, will be
cured by Arsenic)
“Nempe Primum in Corpore Sano medela tentanda est,

sine peregrina ulla miscella odoreque et sapore ejus exploratis,
exigua dosis ingerenda et ad omnes, quae inde contingunt,
affectiones, qis pulsus, qui calor, quae respiratio, quaenam
excretiones, attendendum. Inde ad ductum phaenomenorum,
in sano obviorum, transeas ad experimenta in corpore aegroto”
(L): F.N. to § 108
“Because first the medicine must be tried out on healthy
body without any odd admixture. After one has examined the
odour and the savour, one should give a small dose of it and pay
attention to all what happens to affections which pulse, which
heat, which respiration; which excretions. According to the order
of phenomena, observed in the healthy body, one may proceed
then to experiment on a sick body.”
Nervina (L): Introduction
Please see page 40
Neue Heilart der Kinderpocken (Gn): F.N. to § 46
New healing process of the small pox
Neueste Annalen der franzoesichen Heilkunde (Gn): F.N. §
38
Latest annals of the French medicine.
Nihil quicquam (opinor) animum universae qua patet
medicinae pomoeria perlustrantem, tanta admiratione
percellet, quam discolor illa et sui plane dissimilis morborum
Epidemicorum facies; non tam qua varias ejusdem anni
tempestates, quam qua discrepantes diversorum ab invicem
annorum constitutiones referunt, ab iisque dependent.

Quae tum aperta praedictorum morborum diversitas tum
propriis ac sibi peculiaribus symptomatis, tum etiam medendi
ratione, quam hi ab illis disparem prorsus sibi vendicant,
satis illucescit. Ex quibus constat morbus hosce, ut ut externa
quadantenus specie, et symptomatis aliquot utrisque pariter
supervenientibus, convenire paulo incautioribus videantur,
re tamen ipsa (si bene adverteris animum), alienae admodum
esse indolis, et distare ut aera lupinis’’ (L): F. N. to 81
Sydenham’s observation quoted by Hahnemann. “Nothing
else (I believe) fills the mind which investigates the garden of the
whole medicine with such a great admiration as that discoloured
(varied) and to itself totally dissimilar face of the Epidemic disease.
They reflect not so much the different climates of the same and
each year as they do represent and depend upon the various nature
of different years. This obvious diversity of the above mentioned
sicknesses makes it clear enough that the treatment, due to the
difference of peculiar and individual symptoms between the
diseases, too demands (requires) different medicines.
From this it is clear that these sicknesses, though both may
have, to some extent the same external appearance, and some
common symptoms, and though they seem to be contracted by a
little more careless people, in reality (if you pay good attention),
are of totally alien (different) nature.”
Non Plus Ultra (L): Introduction etc.
There is nothing more beyond.
Nosode : F.N. to § 56
A medicine prepared “from the same contagious principle, that

produces it [the disease].” Or, for example, a medicine prepared
from “a human morbific matter (a psorin taken from the itch in
man).”
In other words—a medicine manufactured from a disease
producing miasm or from a disease product is known as a nosode.
Such as Tuberculinum, Psorinum, Syphilinum etc. And to use
a nosode for the same disease, from which it has been prepared,
is known as Isopathy, (e.g. Tuberculinum in Tuberculosis,
Medorrhinum in Gonorrhoea, Syphilinum in Syphilis etc.)
O tempora ! O mores ! (L): F.N. to § 267
O the time ! O the way !
(Those ancient days are no more !)
Objective Symptoms (L): Sign; a proof of the presence of disease
The symptom which may be observed by any body is an
objective symptom. It is also known as a sign. (Whereas a
subjective symptom, also a proof of the presence of disease, is
felt by the subject, and can only be expressed or told by him).
“Disease manifests itself not merely by objective signs of
sensory impression, but also by subjective symptom of motor
expression.”
J. Krauss
Obscure Symptom: § 95
Please see Accessory Symptom of disease page—48
Obstacles to cure: §§ 3, 5, 260 and the foot notes to §260
These are of various types, and the physician should try,

specially while treating chronic diseases, to find out these, in
each case. Without the removal of the obstacles, if any, one
cannot expect to cure. Many types of obstacle have been named
by Hahnemann at various places. Such as in §§ 5, 94, 208 he
names the accessory circumstances; in §§ 260 et seq. and in the
foot note to § 260 the faults in diet and regimen etc. (which may
please be seen). Any one of which may stand as an obstacle to
the path of cure.
One Sided Disease: §§ 172-184
Disease-conditions, which have ‘too few’ symptoms, are
known as one-sided diseases. Due to the paucity (want) of
symptoms these are difficult to cure. These belong mainly to the
class of chronic diseases.
If the main symptom be an internal trouble, “(e.g. a, headache
of many year’s duration, a diarrhoea of long standing, an ancient
cardialgia etc,)” it is known as simply one-sided disease. If the
trouble be of an external kind it is known as, though wrongly, a
local malady (disease.) (e.g. a leg ulcer).
One sided diseases, have mostly one or two severe symptoms;
others, if at all, are indistinct and vague. This is the reason, why
these conditions are difficult to cure. And, even if a medicine be
given, it may bring in one or more new symptoms, because the
medicine had to be, more or less, a wrong one. In such a condition
the case is reviewed again, as the state of disease now is, and a
more similar remedy is given.
Yet, if the physician be not idle the picture of one sided disease
can be made most of the time tolerably fuller. As for example
one or more accessory symptoms may be discovered; the fuller
detailed pictures of the diseases of the past may be added to the

existing, though small, picture; the family history might give
some clue and the like.
Sometimes the nature of the patient may be slow to react. In
such cases a dose of opium might stir the subject to activity, and
a few symptoms may be brought to light, making the totality of
symptoms tolerably fuller.
Also there are ‘do nothing’ medicines, which bring the masked
symptoms to surface. Hence now-a-days the treatment of one
sided disease is not that difficult as it was at Hahnemann’s time.
One, Single, Simple Medicine: § 273, and its footnote.
By ‘one, single, simple medicine’ (only which is to be given
at a time) Hahnemann meant the following.
“Two substances, opposite to each other, united into
neutral Natrum [salt] and middle salts by chemical affinity in
unchangeable proportions, as well as sulphurated metals found
in the earth and those produced by technical art in constant
combining proportions of sulphur and alkaline salts and earths,
for instance (natrum sulph and calcarea sulph) as well as those
ethers produced by distillation of alcohol and acids may together
with phosphorus be considered as simple medicinal substance by
the homoeopathic physician and used for patients.
“On the other hand those extracts obtained by means of acids
of the so called alkaloids of plants, are exposed to great variety in
this preparation (for instance, chinin, strychnine, morphine), and
can, therefore, not be accepted by the homoeopathic physician as
simple medicines, always the same, especially as he possesses, in
the plants themselves, in their natural state (Peruvian bark, Nux-
vomica. Opium) every quality necessary for healing. Moreover,

the alkaloids are not the only constituents of the plants.”
Opera (L): F.N. to § 40, etc.
Works
“Opiata dolores atrocissimos plerumque sedant atque
indolentiam—procurant eamque—aliquamdiu et pro stato
quodam tempore continuant, quo spatio elapso dolores mox
recrudescunt et brevi ad solitam ferociam augentur.’’ (L):
F.N. to § 58
“Opium most of the time appeases the most atrocius pains
and causes indolence and prolongs it sometimes for certain fixed
time; but when this time is over, the pains soon revive and in a
short time reach the usual ferocity.”
Organon: Please see page 2
Organon, the art of healing: Please see page 2
Organon de l’ art de guerir etc. (Fr.): Please see page 18
Organon of Medicine: Please see page 3
Organum (L): Please see page 40
Palliation : Throughout the book.
1. Antipathic treatment and
2. As long as the disease remains at the same place.
Pathognomonic Symptom: (Gk.)
A symptom characteristic of and observed in disease.
Pathogenetic Symptom: (Gk) §§ 105, 106
A symptom produced by a medicine.
Per Idem (L) Please see page 132

Per se (L) Introduction
In itself; intrinsically as it is.
Peri topon Kat ton Anthropon (Gk):
Please see pages 40, 43
Plethora (L) Please see page 15
Posology (Gk): §§272-287, and the foot notes.
Posos (Gk) means ‘how much’, Logy means the science.
It is the science or doctrine of dosage. It is mainly— the
principles, which guide us to determine, in each case, the form
and amount of the indicated ‘medicine, along with the form and
amount of the vehicle, if any, to be administered at a time.
There cannot be fixed rules to determine the dose in each
case because the drugs vary in power and capabilities (nature).
Yet there are rules to guide us, at every step to take the right
decisions regarding the dosage. Again, the accumulation of all
the knowledge, experienced during the practice by thousands
of physicians, is either verifying the rules already framed, or
is modifying the rules. In this way it is progressing towards
perfection.
Yet, there should be principles to guide. It is true, that the
homoeopathic system is basically liberal, and allows, therefore,
the physicians to use their individual discretions as regards the
potency. Consequently many physicians have come to know of
new facts about particular potencies, along with the conditions
under which these act best.
Highest potencies For instance, J.T. Kent and mainly, say, the
American school used the higher and highest potencies mostly.
They found out, as a result, that only the higher and highest
potencies can re-establish the primary eruption or the primary
secretion. And without the re-establishment of (bringing back)
the primary secretion or eruption, a chronic disease, suppressed
long before, cannot be cured.
Lowest potencies On the other hand, J.C. Burnett and mainly,
say, the British School used the lowest potencies mostly. They
showed consequently, how is it possible to cure the incurable
diseases—where gross tissue changes have taken place—say the
cancerous disease-conditions.
But each school remained ignorant about the potencies it did
not use, depriving the patients needing these badly.
Also, the physicians, who preferred only the medium potencies
ever, knew neither the miracles of the highest, nor the wonders
of the lowest. The fascination, for either the highest (1000 and
above), or the lowest (Q or 1 × to 6 × or 12 ×) or the medium
only (3—200) is not only prejudicial but also suicidal. The best
way is described below.
“The entire series [Q, 1 × to MM etc.] should be open to every
practitioner, and that each man should be competent, willing and
ready to use any potency or preparation of the remedy indicated
in a given case, without prejudice. If he confine himself to one
or two potencies, be they low, medium or high, he is limiting
his own usefulness and depriving his patient of valuable means
of relief and cure.”
“Under homoeopathic principles any potency may be required
in any case. It is unreasonable to expect to cure all cases with any
two or three potencies, as it is to expect to cure all cases with any
two or three remedies. Dose as well as remedy must be adjusted

to the patient’s need.”
S. Close
Now how to adjust i.e. select the appropriate potency in each
case? This is also a process of individualisation, as elsewhere.
Five considerations influence us in the choice of the dose.
1. The susceptibility of the patient.
2. The seat of the disease.
3. The nature and intensity of the disease.
4. The stage and duration of the disease.
5. The previous treatment of the disease.
1. “The more similar the remedy, the more clearly and
positively the symptoms of the patient take on the peculiar
and characteristic form of the remedy, the greater the
susceptibility to that remedy, and the higher the potency
required.”
S. Close
2. “Whenever the purpose of a drug is to improve the
metabolism of a definite organ or tissue by gentle
stimulation, low potencies and repeated doses are suitable,
while if the aim is to influence a central mechanism of
life, the higher potencies and infrequently repeated doses
are of more value.”
C. E. Wheeler
3., 4. “It is a common experience that low potencies and repeated
doses are effective in acute diseases, and acute diseases have
very marked tissue relationships (e.g. pneumonia, enteric
etc.)—but the spinal cord, threatened by some deep-acting

enemy [chronic disease] that will ultimately destroy it,
may be slightly helped by gentle stimulation, but in as
much as the natural forces will rarely suffice to defeat the
enemy, cure can only be found in some remedy that will
enhance this more central mechanism of defence, and that
must be a general, not a local, remedy.” Hence, the need
of higher potency.
C. E Wheeler
5. “If the patient [suffering from syphilis-for example]
presents himself later, having already received the
conventional large doses of mercury and potash until the
characteristic dynamic and pathogenetic symptoms of
those drugs have been produced, low potencies will be
of no avail. Either susceptibility has been exhausted, or a
drug idiosyncrasy has been developed. The drugs must be
antidoted and the further treatment carried on by higher
potencies.”
S. Close
“Probably there is a use for all potencies, from tincture to the
highest ever made, and it is only by observation and experience
that any trustworthy conclusions can be reached.”
C. E. Wheeler
Potency and Potentisation:
1. Power; medicinal virtues; liberated energies of the latent
powers; drugs, basically either inert or toxic/poisonous or
insoluble, changed into medicinal substances.
2. Potencies are neither mere attenuations, nor dilutions.

Potencies are preparations of drugs, according to the
directions of Hahnemann; (primarily in the Organon
of Medicine, The Chronic Diseases, The Materia
Medica Pura and other articles; or later—according to
the directions of a Homoeopathic Pharmacopoeia) in a
mathematico-mechanical process, mainly to turn each
substance into a potential medicine.
Hahnemann’s explanations, clarifications and directions, to
potentise each substance to be used as medicine, are unique. This
assertion that, “it [the potentising process] deserves incontestably
to be reckoned among the greatest discoveries of this age” has
been verified to be very true during the last hundred and seventy
five years. His definition of the potencies or potentisations or
dynamisations, is shown below.
Dilutions or Attenuations
“Actual dilutions are almost wholly confined to sapid
and coloured objects; A solution of salt or bitter substances
becomes always more tasteless the more water is mixed with it,
and at length loses almost all taste, though we may shake it as
much as we please; and in like manner a solution of a coloured
substance becomes, by the admixture of more and more water,
at last almost quite colourless, and gains no increase of colour by
any imaginable shaking.”
“These are and continue to be true attenuations or dilutions,
but not dynamisations.”
Dynamisations or Potencies
“Homoeopathic dynamisations are real awakenings of the
medicinal properties that lie dormant in natural bodies during
their crude state, which then become capable of acting in almost

a spiritual manner upon our life that is to say, on our percipient
(sensitive) and excitable (irritable) fibres. These developments of
properties (dynamisations) in crude medicinal substances, which
were unknown before me, are accomplished, as I first taught,
by the trituration of dry substances in a mortar, but in the case
of liquid substances by succussion, which is nothing less than a
trituration of them. These preparations, therefore, cannot have
the term dilutions applied to them, although every preparation of
the sort, in order to potentise it higher—that is to say, in order to
awaken and develop still farther the medicinal properties that still
be latent in it—must first be again yet more attenuated to allow
the trituration or succussion to penetrate more deeply into the
essential nature of the medicinal substance, and thus to liberate
and bring to light the more subtile part of the medicinal power
that lies still deeper, which were impossible to be effected by the
greatest amount of trituration and succussion of substances in a
concentrated state.”
‘The Chronic Diseases,’ Part 5, 2nd Edition.
“By continual diluting and succussing remedies get neither
stronger nor weaker, but their individual peculiarities become
more and more developed.” Jahr
Potentiation: §§ 266—272, the foot notes and the Chronic
Diseases.
“Homoeopathic potentiation [potentisation] is a mathematico-
mechanical process for the reduction, according to scale of crude,
inert or poisonous medical substances to a state of physical
solubility, physiological assimilability, therapeutic activity and
harmlessness, for use as homoeopathic healing remedies.”
S. Close
The Process: The most reliable way to potentise a drug is

to triturate it. Trituration may be done either in decimal or in
centesimal scale. At the beginning, but, the centesimal scale is
preferred.
The trituration is nothing but reduction or subdivision of
a drug (mostly insoluble substances, e.g. metals or minerals,
inorganic substances etc, also oils and the like) in mortar and
pestle. One part of the drug is mixed with ninety nine parts of
milk sugar (for centesimal scale) and rubbed for an hour. One
1
part of this powder (containing 100 th of the drug) is again mixed
with 99 parts of milk sugar and rubbed for an hour. One part of
1
this powder (containing 10, 000 th of the drug) is finally mixed
with 99 parts of milk sugar and rubbed for another hour. One
1
part of this powder now contains only 10, 000, 000 th (millionth)
part of the original drug. This process, of only 3 hours, is a
small and simple one. But in the meantime the most insoluble
substance (say gold or platinum, sand or stone) is ready to be
dissolved in water ! Henceforth, therefore, further potencies are
prepared with alcohol, it being the best preservative and the least
medicinal liquid.
Two factors are, therefore, necessary and go into the process
of subdividing the drug cum potentising it. These are friction and
addition of the vehicle (such as milk sugar and alcohol).
Potencies are also prepared from the beginning, with absolute
alcohol, where the drug is soluble in water, e.g. juices of plants
and the like. And these, too, may be prepared in either decimal
(one part say a drop— of the drug plus 9 drops of alcohol) or
centesimal (one drop plus 99 drops of alcohol) scale.
Please also see the §§ 266-272, the footnotes and the Chronic
Diseases.
Preventive Medicine: § 4, F.N. to § 33, 46, 141 Article on
cholera; The Chronic Disease etc. F.N. to § 83 of the 2nd
and 3rd Editions.
At the very beginning of the book, in § 4, Hahnemann says
that the physician has to be not only ‘a true practitioner of the
healing art’ [§ 3] but also ‘He is likewise a preserver of health if he
knows the things that derange health and cause disease, and how
to remove them from person in health.” i.e. protecting persons
with preventive medicines.
In the foot note to § 33, he says § “—when the smooth
scarlatina of Sydenham still occasionally prevailed epidemically
among children—all the children who took in time a very small
dose of belladonna remained unaffected by this highly infectious
infantile disease. If medicines can protect from disease that is
raging around, they must possess a vastly superior power of
affecting our vital force.”
In the foot note to § 46,—“This seems to be the reason for
this beneficial remarkable fact namely that since the general
distribution of Jenner’s Cowpox Vaccination, human small pox
never again appeared as epidemically or virulently as 40-50 years
before” etc.
In the foot note to § 114,—”Those trials made by the
Physician on himself have for him other and inestimable
advantages. —The organism of the prover becomes, by these
frequent attacks on his health, all the more expert in repelling
all external influences inimical to his frame and all artificial and
natural morbific noxious agents, and becomes more hardened
to resist everything of an injurious character, by means of these
moderated experiments in his own person with medicines. His
health becomes more unalterable—” etc.
In the article on Cholera (Lesser Writings) he named cuprum
met, as the best preventive of cholera; also camphor to be a
preventive medicine; both being curative too.
In the foot note to § 83 of the 2nd and 3rd editions of organon
he says—
“—Whilst the old, rarely now seen scarlet fever required for its
prevention and cure belladonna only, the purpura miliaris could
only be cured by aconite in the smallest dose.”
Apart from “uniform prophylactic power exerted by
belladonna against scarlatina and by copper against cholera,” the
genius of an epidemic becomes not only the curative for most
of the cases, but also the preventive medicine for one and all not
yet affected.
Again, in the Article in Materia Medica Pura, 2nd Edition,
brought from the ‘Examination of the sources of the common
Materia Medica’, we see, in the note, the instances of use of
Belladonna in scarlatina, of Aconite and coffea in purpura miliaris,
of spongia and Hepar sulph in croup, of Drosera in whooping
cough, of Thuja in condylomata, and of mercurius corrosivus
in autumnal Dysentery as specific medicines. And a specific
medicine for a disease condition is the best preventive medicine
to it. Further, Hahnemann mentions, also about ‘Bark in endemic
Malarial fever, Spongia in Goitre, Veratrum Album in the water
colic of Lauenburg; Aurum met in the propensity to suicide’ etc.
These are, already verified drugs and are, dependable preventive

medicines. Further, the removal of causes of disease along with
the maintenance of sanitation and hygiene is the part and parcel
of prevention of disease.
“In his first homoeopathic essay of 1796 Hahnemann speaks
of the removal of causes as the most elevated way—and in his
Organon, from its first edition in 1810 to its last—he begins by
assuming that both to prevent disease and to make his curative
treatment unobstructed and permanent, the physician will also
be a hygienist”
R. Hughes
Lastly, any one of the antipsoric medicines is a constitutional
medicine, which again is a preventive medicine. And a
constitutional medicine, prevents the person, for whom it is
indicated, from all the disease conditions, the medicine is capable
of producing in healthy human beings.
And, what are, actually, homoeopathic medicines? “—it may
be mentioned that drugs are capable of acting as antigens, and
that the stimulation obtained through homoeopathy is actually
comparable to antigen antibody reactions or immunologic
processes—
Watters has shown that calcium sulphide increases the opsonic
index to staphylococci.
Milton has demonstrated group agglutinins for typhoid and
paratyphoid bacilli as a result of baptisia administration. He has
also shown that veratrum viride increases the opsonic index to
pneumococci.
Wheeler has produced heightened opsonic index to tubercle
bacilli by giving phosphorus to human beings.
Hooker has brought about elaboration of agglutinins in

healthy human beings’ to the typhoid-paratyphoid dysentery
group of bacilli by the use of either phosphoric acid, or arsenious
anhydride, or mercuric chloride.”
Mc. Gavack
Prima Causa Morbi (L): Introduction
Prime causes of diseases
Please see pages 26—28
Primary Action of Medicine: Please see pages 55
Primae Viae (L): Introduction of the first way
Proving of Medicines: §§ 105—145
Testing of drugs on healthy human beings; Drug proving;
Recording of pure effects of drugs; pathogenetic symptoms of
medicine; acquiring a knowledge, of the instruments intended
for the cure of the natural diseases. (§ 105)
The second act (duty) of each physician, for curing the patient,
is this proving of drugs on healthy human beings. Because ‘all
the curative power of medicines lies in this power they possess of
changing the state of man’s health and is revealed by observation
of the latter.’ (§ 108)
§109 Hahnemann, who was the first person in the whole
history of mankind, who proved drugs, found out the
purest possible effects of (99) drugs “and made thereby
the practice of medicine scientific.” And the only scientific
practice of medicine, because Hahnemann found out,
again for the first time, “the symptomatic source of both
pathological and therapeutic diagnosis.” That is, the
symptoms are the only guide not only to recognise the
disease, but also to recognise, simultaneously, the medicine

required for cure. This is possible only when the physician
knows the pure pathogenetic (disease producing) powers
of many drugs beforehand.
§110 The proving is done on healthy persons only. Otherwise
we would always remain in the dark, if the changes are
observed (the proving is done) in sick persons. Such as
whether the changes belonged to the drug, or to natural
progress of the disease, or to both.
§111 “According to fixed eternal law of nature,” each drug
produces “Certain, reliable disease symptoms each according
to its own peculiar character.”
§114 The changes observed are nothing but the primary
§113 action of the drugs. (In the secondary action, i.e. in
the reaction of the vital principle the symptoms—i.e.
the changes—disappear). The only exceptions are the
narcotic drugs. In these cases—the senses are benumbed
in the primary action, and “in their secondary action
an increased sensibility (and a greater irritability) is
observable.”
§ 115 There are some drugs, which, as long as these are working,
produce diametrically opposite types of symptom. Both
the symptoms are their own, and are only “the alternating
state of the various paroxysms of the primary action: they
are termed alternating actions”
§116 Some symptoms, are produced by a drug in many persons;
some symptoms, less in number, are produced in fewer
persons, and still fewer symptoms are produced by the
drug in hardly, say, one or two persons.
* the non-excitable (hyposensitive) type of idiosyncrasies

§ 117 The persons who get hardly affected by a drug (therefore

produce just a few symptoms) are abnormal persons
(having peculiar constitutions)* although they appeared
to be, before proving, healthy,
This “inability” of the drug to affect every person equally,
is only “apparent.” And this is so because no event can ever be
unconditional. And the production of more symptoms or less
depends upon two factors always.
“For as two things are required for the production of these as
well as all other morbid alterations in the health of man, to wit
[i] the inherent power of the influencing substance and
[ii] the capability of the vital force to be influenced by it.”
Non-production of symptoms, therefore, depends not only
upon the drug’s inability, but also upon the person’s inability to
be affected by the drug.
On the contrary, there are also persons who although
apparently healthy, get seriously affected by substances which
produce no effect in most of the people. These are equally
abnormal persons (having peculiar constitutions).**
§ 118 “Every medicine has peculiar actions of its own, which are
not produced in exactly the same manner by any other
medicinal substance of a different kind.”
The drug may produce more symptoms in one, and less
symptoms in another, and almost no symptom (or, hardly one
or two) in still another person. Yet-its capability, to affect every
person equally, is proved by the fact that any and every ill person,
exhibiting symptoms produced in others, but not in him during
proving, will be cured by the drug.
** the hyper-excitable (hyper-sensitive) type of idiosyncrasies.

§ 119 As every substance—animal, botanic, mineral or

§ 120 otherwise—differs basically from all others, its
pathogenetic, therefore its therapeutic, effects too differ
from others. And because on every drug depends man’s
very life, each drug should be tested most carefully,
thoroughly and accurately so that its pure effects and
powers may be distinguished perfectly from others.
§ 121 Strong drugs should be given to the provers in small doses,
and the milder ones in large doses. But to observe the
powers of the mildest possible drugs, the provers should be
“free from disease, and—delicate, irritable and sensitive.”
§ 122 Genuine single drugs should be taken in ‘simple
§ 123 unadulterated form; e.g. freshly expressed juice’
§ 124 of plants, alcohol tincture of the fresh vegetable substances;
only salts and gums are to be mixed with water just before
taking it; boiled-water infusion of dry plants should be
taken while still warm, otherwise it spoils soon, if not
mixed with alcohol.
§ 125 During proving substances of any medicinal nature
§ 126 should be avoided, regular diet should consist of pure,
simple unspiced yet nutritious substances; stimulating
drinks are to be avoided.
§137 The prover must be ‘pre-eminently trustworthy and
conscientious’ and should avoid during “the experiment
all over-exertion of body and mind, all sorts of dissipation
and disturbing passions; he should have no urgent business
to distract his attention; he must devote himself to careful
self observation” and he should be intelligent enough to
express and describe his sensations accurately. He should

also be truthful and temperate.
§ 127 To acquire the changes in sexual sphere, the drug must
be tested on both males and females.
§128 If a substance does not produce appreciable symptoms in
its crude state (there are many which do not), it is always
better to give 4—6 globules of its 30th potency mixed
with some water, daily, on an empty stomach, for some
days. If the effects are still inconsiderable, the medicine
may be repeated daily, till the effects are produced. It is
better to begin with milder doses and then increase it or
repeat it according to the needs of different rovers.
§ 130 If the dose be strong at the very beginning, the advantage
is manifold—The order of succession of symptoms is
learnt; the accurate time is noted when the symptom
appears; thereby the genius of the drug is found out,
also the alternating action, if any, is clearly observed etc.
If the experimenter be sufficiently delicate and sensitive
then a moderate dose suffices for the above purposes. The
duration of the action can be verified only by repeating
the experiment.
§ 131 On the contrary, if the drug is to be repeated
§ 132 for days, the order of succession is lost; the secondary
action removes some symptoms, and the secondary action
gets mixed up with the primary action etc.; although
various symptoms are produced.
§ 133 It is advantageous, therefore, to take various positions
(to move, to walk, and to take rest etc.) during proving
to observe the various aggravating and ameliorating

conditions.
§ 134 Although all the pathogenetic capabilities of medicine
§ 135 can only be known from several tests, on many persons
and in various times, yet—all inherent
§ 136 powers of a drug are observed to act curatively in all
persons, at all places and at any time, when ever they fall
ill and exhibit its symptoms.
§ 139 If the prover be not a physician, he should note down
distinctly the sensations, suffering, accidents (signs and/
or symptoms) and every change,
§ 140 along with the time of occurrence, and the duration
of it, also the exact time when the dose was taken. The
physician should examine the reports immediately after
the experiment; or examine daily, if the experiment
continues for days together. So that the prover omits
nothing and the physician verifies the report—or change
the report to get the more precise details.
If the prover cannot write, the physician should enquire about
all the changes and note down everything authentic, not forgetting
the rules of questionnaire told in §§84—99.
§ 141 But the best provings—are those which the healthy,
unprejudiced and sensitive physician institutes on himself
with all the caution and care here enjoined. He knows
with the greatest certainty the things he has experienced
in his own person.
§ 143 If we have many, well tested drugs, only then we have “a
true materia medica-a collection of real pure, reliable
modes of action of simple medicinal substances, a volume

of the book of nature.” Each such drug, true pathogenetic
powers of which is well known, may be used for effecting
“certain and permanent cure.”
§ 144 Such a materia medica is “the pure language of nature
carefully and honestly interrogated,” and which strictly
excludes “everything that is conjectural, all that is mere
assertion or imaginary.”
§ 145 Drugs, of only such a materia medica, can cure any and
every type of even the incurable conditions, found, not
only now-a-days, but also to be found in the future.
“Thus our pathogenetic knowledge, when truly obtained and
registered, is like a picture gallery, in which the discovering eye
may perceive the lineaments of all morbid condition known or
like to occur”
R. Hughes
Pseudo Chronic Disease: § 77
False chronic disease; “inappropriately named chronic
disease.” Such disease conditions, which are produced from
‘avoidable noxious influences,” are known as ‘pseudo’ or ‘false
chronic diseases.’ Because such a condition continues for long,
it looks like a chronic disease. Yet, it disappears of itself when the
mode of living is improved.
Such an abnormal state of health is produced from non-
maintenance of hygienic and sanitary rules for long. Such as,
“prolonged abstinence from things that are necessary for the
support of life, who reside in unhealthy localities, especially
marshy districts, who are housed in cellars or other confined
dwelling, who are deprived of exercise or of open air, who ruin

their health by over exertion of body or mind, who live in a
constant state of worry etc.”
Any one of the above or other avoidable harmful condition
is known as a maintaining cause, the removal of which suffices
to bring the person back to health, provided there is no chronic
miasm present.
Psora (Gk): Introduction. §§ 80, 81, 103,
(Psoraelia) (Gk): 204—206; Chronic Diseases
(Psorat) (Hb):
The last of the 3 Fundamental Causes.
Hahnemann’s group nomenclature for all the miasmatic, non-
venereal true (or proper, or natural) chronic disease conditions;
A group of miasms, each of which is responsible for a specific
infectious (contagious), non-venereal chronic disease-condition;
The third miasm, apart from Syphilis and Sycosis.
“I call it Psora.—to give it a general name.”
‘Chronic diseases’.
(As-Ayurveda too put 18 types of skin diseases under the title
KUSTHA).
These psoric miasms are named together, since each one is
non-venereal, and has some common features at the beginning
(i.e. as primary symptoms). Such as an eruption on the skin and
itching, more or less, due to it.
“A certain proportion of the affections so characterised
were traceable to venereal infection – Syphilitic or Sycotic (i.e.
Gonorrhaeal); and it seemed to him [Hahnemann] that the
remaining seven—eighths (it is here that these figures come in)

must have some analogous miasmatic origin. In the medical
literature of his day he found numerous observations (he cites
97 of them) of the supervention of such diseases-upon the
suppression of cutaneous eruptions-among which scabies—then
very prevalent—held a prominent place. In this last he had found
the ‘miasm’ he wanted. It resembled syphilis in its communication
by contact, its stage of incubation and its local development, while
it was far more general. He thereupon propounded it as- together
with the other contagious skin affections, the Tinea etc, which he
regarded as varieties of it—the source of the non-specific Chronic
Diseases, understood as defined.”
R. Hughes
“In this collection we see the most diverse skin diseases
grouped with itch, scald head, various kinds of lichen, leprosy,
swollen glands of the neck and facial eruptions. This is certainly
sufficient proof how widely Hahnemann understood the term
‘itch’ or ‘psora’.—
“—he [Hahnemann] used the word in a wider sense, inspite
of the fact that,—he knew the cause of itch mite (Acarus scabiei
or Sarcoptes hominis), its destruction by external remedies—
and the digging out of the mite from its burrows under the
skin. He shared also the view—that the itch eruption could
only develop on a favourable fostering ground, called ‘Internal
Psora.’ The latter, however, was not cured with the destruction
or removal of the mites, although of course it was necessary
first of all to remove the parasite. —Psora, ‘the internal itch’,
was totally different in his opinion from the external ailment,
the primary eruption. The latter could be cured quickly and
easily, whilst the internal Psora, often remaining latent for a

long time and only showing secondary symptoms as a result
of special factors, was a wearisome disease.”
“The first therapeutic principle—demands that no eruption
shall be removed by external remedies.”
—“This is quite understandable since to him the skin eruption
is not a local symptom at all, not a disease itself but simply a sign
of internal unhealthiness or disorder,—infact a sign of psora.”
R. Haehl
“The human skin cannot without the Help of the rest of the
living body produce from itself an eruption. It will never become
diseased in any way unless the general diseased condition, the
abnormal state of the whole organism, compels it. In every case
the improper condition of the whole body, of the inner living
organism, is at the root of the trouble and therefore this must
first be considered and should be removed by internal medicines,
which will alter, improve and cure the whole.
Thereupon the eruption, depending for existence on the
internal disease will cure itself and disappear—often more speedily
than by external remedies.”
‘Chronic Diseases,’
As because the disease processes under Psora are many in
number (and vary among themselves), the medicines too to cure
each one effectively, are many. (Please see the List of Antipsorics)
“Hahnemann’s idea of psora coincides to a large extent with
that of inherited predisposition to disease, weakened conditions
of individual organs or systems, with which our cell centres are

burdened”
Schlegel
“—The state of the skin depends on the stomach and the
bowels, and that many disturbances in the course of digestion and
metabolism manifest themselves as skin eruption. We find that
disturbances in the nervous system as well as in the circulation and
state of the blood may lead to skin diseases. Interference with the
action of the kidneys or of the liver may find expression in disease
of the external skin and even the sexual organs particularly of the
female, are in close connection with the external cuticle. What
action is exerted on the skin by certain diseases of the glands, with
an internal secretion (thyroid gland, ovaries, testicles, supra-renal
capsules, pituitary gland etc.) must remain reserved for future
research. So much however, is established, to day to prove that
some of these disturbances (Addison’s disease) cause considerable
alterations of the skin.”
Bulkley, in
‘On the relationships of diseases of the skin to internal
disturbance.’
“The ultimate purpose of Hahnemann’s psora theory is to
show the connection between skin diseases and the rest of body.
—the serious complications, which may arise as a result of violent
repression and suppression of skin eruptions—.
“Hahnemann’s psora theory forms—not only a completion
of the law of similars, but also an improvement and a perfection
of the homoeopathic science of healing in general—”
R. Haehl
Qualifications of a Physician: please see pages 74,75

Quidquid in Buccam Venit (L): F.N. to § 149
Each time a mouthful.
Q. V. (q. v) (L): Throughout the footnotes.
The short form of ‘quod vide’.
It means: ‘which see’.
Rapid Cure : § 2
The cure has to be rapid; because longer the suffering, more
chances of tissue change. And more the tissue change the more
incurable the disease becomes.
A disease condition can be cured—”if the disease do not
manifestly depend on a considerable deterioration of an important
viscus (even though it belong to the chronic and complicated
diseases)”—§ 279
“If the disease is to be cured, it must be taken at an earlier
period, before there has occurred that ‘serious disorganisation of
important viscera’, which Hahnemann speaks of as an ‘insuperable
obstacle to recovery’.”*
R. Hughes
Reine Arzneimittellehre (Gn): F. N. to 5 109, and at other
places. Materia Medica Pura
Remedy: A medicine selected and prescribed for a case is
known as remedy.
Repellents (L): Please see page 42
* Lesser writings, page 261

Repetition of same Potency: § 251

Only in the cases, of drugs having alternating actions, it is
allowed that the same drug in the same potency may be given. It is
done only when such a drug fails to cure in the first prescription.
Requisites of a Physician: Please see pages 74, 75
Return of original Symptoms: § 280
When the patient “begins to feel in a mild degree the return
of one or several old original complaints. This indicates an
approaching cure—”etc.
Please also see Homoeopathic Aggravation, pages 63
Roborantta (L): Please see page 42
Roodvonk (Gn): F.N. to § 73
Purpura miliaris (L)
Science (L): Organised or systematised
(Scientia (L) from scire: to know) Knowledge.
“Science is verified or verifiable knowledge, produced by
conception of percepts, induction of deducts.”
J. Krauss
“Associations legitimately applied yield science”
Sir James Frazer
Scientif icity of Potencies of Homoeopathic Medicines:
The corresponding paragraph to § 283 in the 1st Edition of
Organon has a note, a part of which is shown below. This was
a reply to those, who questioned and disbelieved the potencies;

that is, since these contained not even single atoms of the drug,
these were simply nothing.
“Dissect, if you can, the component parts of the infusorial
animalcule, and you have hardly got down to the commencement
of the things which in creation are to be called small. And what
power resides in each of the countless organs which shorten
and elongate the body of the animalcule, and enable it to dart
quickly about in fluids, besides, the unknown ways in which it
contributes to the vital operations, the purposes, the pleasures
and the reproductive work of the minute organism !
What immeasurable great energy resides in these parts which
our limited faculties deem so small ! Short-sighted man ! How
with your coarse mechanical scales can you determine the exact
weight at which they will cease to have any effect?
“The doctrine of divisibility of matter teaches us that we
cannot make a part so small that it shall cease to be something,
and that it shall not share all the properties of the whole.—
‘And why should there be doubts about the powerfulness of
such small but still material doses of homoeopathic remedies,
though their calculated weight is extremely small, since some of
the most powerful counter-disease forces are quite imponderable,
and yet have a great influence on the health of man? Who is
ignorant of the medicinal powers of cold or heat? Who does not
know the power of electricity and galvanism? Who will deny the
heroic, often too great power of animal magnetism in altering
man’s health? And what can surpass the counter-disease force
which the magnet has clearly manifested in a great number of
diseases.?” etc.
This was published in 1810.

Yet, the medical word totally discarded the idea that such
infinitesimals could contain any drug or these could act in any
way. But what are they doing to-day?
“Medical authorities recommend one ten-millionth of a grain
of old tuberculin as capable of producing untoward reaction; this
is our 7x. The minimum lethal dose of crude botulinum toxin
filtrate has been found to be one four hundred quintillionth cubic
centimeter, or our 20x.
“In 1922 Krawkow demonstrated in his laboratory the
pharmacological activity of adrenalin, bichloride of mercury and
copper sulphate in the 24x, and histamin and silver nitrate in the
32x.
“Kalisko, working with salts of iron and copper on wheat germs
found activity upto the 1—1,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,00
0,000,000 dilution (30x).”
Mc. Gavack
But are there answers to some questions, (on the level of
physics and/or chemistry) put forward by scientific men? See them
answered below, along with the questions.
1. How do I know that by potentising, a certain ‘fall of
potential’ is increased? By comparing, e.g. under the
Microscope various potencies of a substance and finding
that from the first to second, from the second to the
third degree (no matter whether decimal or centesimal)
of potentisation, the substance becomes increasingly
subdivided, its particles more and more regularly
distributed within the medium and the relative distances
of the particles increased. Considering the particles as

bearers of potential action (say ‘charges’ in respect of
colloids and electrolytes) I know from elementary physics
that increased surface, greater distance enforced by an
indifferent medium (say. protective medium for colloids,
dielectric for electrolytes) and greater regularity in their
arrangement—all tend to elevate the level of potential
energy of this substance; which potential becomes manifest
in action and can be measured as energy when conditions
arise for equalising such a difference of potential.
2. What does this ‘fall of potential’ mean?
As any text book of physics will state: the difference
between a higher and a lower level of energy. The retention
of an elevated energy level in the case of a ‘potency’ means
stored energy.
3. Does this refer to a certain mutual attitude between
the medicine molecules?
‘Mutual attitude’ is too obscure. Possible reactions between
molecules of the medicinal substance themselves do not
concern the matter under discussion.
4. Or, to parts of molecules in respect of each other?
The same applies. The level of any particles, whether
molecules or ions, depends upon the degree of their
subdivision. I trust that, in the field of eloctrolytic
dissociation [every one] has plenty of examples at hand
and has heard even of such experimentally proven ‘laws’
Ostwald’s: the degree of dissociation of a weak electrolyte
is approximately proportional to the square root of the
dilution. That implies that here with increased dilution
the dissociation and hence the potential ionic activity, e.g.

conductivity, increases.
5. Or, perhaps to the molecules of the medicine in
comparison with the molecules of the medium?

So far as conditions of interaction between them through
equalisation of such a difference should arise; a possibility
which has tentatively been considered, in respect of
potentisation, by the radiation-induction hypothesis. The
induction of a higher potential (of motion, heat, electric
charge etc) to an indifferent (meaning low-level) medium
is a very common occurrence but whether radiation is
actually transmitted to the medium in a trituration I do
not know.
6. What is a ‘pure’ emission of energy quanta?
This is apparently a mistaken report on what I have said
about effects of radiation (emission of energy quanta).
I submitted that these effects become ‘purer’, i.e. more
distinctive of the peculiar substance, the freer, more
discreet, the emitting particles are; the less interference
by other particles, the greater the chance that a peculiar
rhythm of radiation is discriminated by a sensitive system.
This concerns the specificity, not the intensity of action
on such system.
7. How do I know that this is brought about by the increase
in ‘fall of potential’ as recorded?
The separation of emitting particles (I use this expression
for the dual models, particles and waves) has been shown
to constitute an elevation of the level of potential energy.
The actual effects depend on further conditions.
8. Has the action of medicines any connection with emission

of energy by these substances?
I cannot see whether that question is of the sort which
cannot be answered by ten savants or whether it entails
only a platitude; so I say, yes.
9. If so, what is then the effect in these (?) from the ‘becoming
purer’ of these emissions?
So far as the question makes any sense to me, I repeat:
the effect of the medicine will be more specific for that
particular substance because there is less interference.
10. How do I arrive at the revolutionary opinion that it
is possible and that with such simple means as the
homoeopath employs, to make atoms emit quanta which
are not specific for their structure?
Probably the confused question refers as to radiation elicited
by triturating a substance. If so, this is not a revolutionary
opinion of mine, but a fact observed by others and described as
triboluminiscence.”
Otto Leeser
Scientific Conception of Wholistic approach, Dynamic action
etc.
“The principle of optima is a formula comprising the
conditions of space, time, quality, quantity and form which have
to be considered as interdependent with regard to any particular
action”
Otto Leeser
Scientific Conception of health and disease, potentised and
crude drugs, order and chaos etc.
“Entropy is a measurable index of the irreversible loss of energy

which ensues when a ‘system’ or ‘object’ changes from higher
temperature (i.e. greater frequency of motility) to a state of lower
temperature (lesser frequency of motility), —A consequence of
this principle is that a system of higher orders higher organisation
(or however one may call this higher grade of integrated actions)
contains something which is irretrievably lost when it is reduced
in the direction of chaos.”
Otto Lesser
Scientific conception of individualistic approach, nothing
static but dynamic, etc.
“Each and every action is unique, cannot recur as the same
(e.g. we cannot bathe in the same river twice), but only as if it
were the same, i.e. as similar”
Heraklitos
“Thus we would be able to observe only recurrences of
events, but surely with continuity in them and constancy in their
sequence, so that one certain kind of event will not be seen to
occur without certain preceding events conditioning it.”
Otto Lesser
Scientific Conception of Chronic Miasms
“Hahnemann’s ‘miasms’ were three, but his actual classification
is of little importance.
“He never used what he thought to be the nature of the
poison itself guide to his remedy, but always the reaction of the
patient as manifested in the symptoms. He placed syphilis as one
great poison, for instance; herein he was right in so far as when
syphilis is present (however latent), or even when syphilis has

been present, the tissue reactions of the patient will be thereby
modified, and what ever his immediate complaint, his syphilis
must be considered in treating him: indeed his syphilis may be
the ultimate cause of many groups of symptoms not in themselves
characteristically syphilitic. The same is true of gonorrhoea, of
tubercle, probably, of other germ diseases—his nomenclature
to-day is of little importance. It is the underlying conception
that matters.
“To the extent to which we realise to-day the existence of
these disease-germs capable of prolonged sojourn in the body,
giving rise thereby to a variety of lesions and of symptoms, we
are conceiving chronic disease much as Hahnemann did when in
the days before bacteriology, he spoke of ‘miasms’.
‘But it is more fruitful for practice to think (as he always
did) primarily of body reactions and only secondarily of body
invaders. Not so much the germ, as the mode and power of
resistance to it, matters. These resistances, infinite varieties of
these adjustments, personals to individuals, counting indeed for
much of bodily individuality. Some of these will be such as to
render individuals immune from this or the other germ, others
again will leave the possessors of them specially susceptible. These
special conditions [or diathesis] can conceivably be inherited, and
these (with all their dangers) would be the causes of ‘inherited
miasms’ of Hahnemann.”
C. E. Wheeler
Scientific Elements and Nature of The Chronic Diseases’:
“—experience had guided Hahnemann to a method
supplementing his former one. By tackling the problem of chronic
diseases, namely by finding from experience a limited range of

medicines particularly suited to alternating diseases, Hahnemann
made possible another advance, additional to that of the general
basic method. This advance has hardly begun to be exploited.
“—his pragmatic tackling of a profound and pressing problem
was a great step forward in medicine, an advance which is much
in need of further development.”
“—the main practical advantage of this new thought lies in the
fact that it enables us to take into account decisive events in the
patient’s past history, not only in his status praesens [present state],
when it comes to selecting the curative agent. The incongruence in
the development of Hahnemann’s thought and practice is only on
the surface, underlying it is very sound and continuous progress.”
Otto Leeser
Secundum Artem (L): Introduction
Please see page 42
Si non Juvat, Modo ne noceat (L): F.N. to § 246
It means, ‘If it (the medicine) does not help, it may, at least,
not harm.’ That is, we should never forget the time honoured
maxim.
Si mode Essent ! (L): Introduction
It means, ‘If only they were !’
Hahnemann wants to mean, to emphasize, (more so with the
exclammation mark), that disease is never cured by extracting any
thing material out of the body. Because neither the disease itself
nor the cause of natural diseases is any thing matter (of material
nature), to be extracted from body for cure.
Sign: Any diagnostic objective symptom is a sign.
Evidence of disease, usually objective;
Sign and Symptom:
sensory impression, but also by subjective symptoms of motor
expression”
J. Krauss
Signs of Improvement: §§ 253 to 256
The very first signs of improvement (or of deterioration)
especially in acute diseases are observed, although difficult to
perceive by ‘every one,’ in “the state of mind and the whole
demeanour of the patient.” The signs of improvement are, “a
greater degree of comfort, increased calmness and freedom of the
mind, higher spirits—a kind of the natural state.’
On the other hand, in case of deterioration, “a constrained,
helpless, pitiable state of the disposition, of the mind, of the whole
demeanour, and of all gestures, postures and actions, which may
be easily perceived on close observation, but cannot be described
in words.” Another sign of improvement is the disappearance of
original symptoms, “without any addition of new ones.”
§ 254 On the other hand appearance of new symptoms is the
sign of deterioration (aggravation). Although, there will
be patients who either will not be able to express the
aggravation or amelioration, or will be unwilling to express
the same.
§ 255 Yet checking of all the original symptoms, one by one,

would reveal, even from patients of the above types, either
of the two types of change. If there be no new symptoms,
and no aggravation of any old symptom, it would indicate,
along with the slight betterment in disposition, that the
medicine has been the correct one. And it would do all
that is wanted very soon.
If, on the other hand, there be delay in improvement,
“supposing the remedy is perfectly appropriate”, it is either due
to “some error of conduct on the part of the patient, or [some]
other interfering circumstances.”
§ 256 Even if some patient “good-naturedly assure us that he feels
better”, after one or more new symptoms have appeared
(e.g. coughing out of blood in a tubercular patient), we
should not believe him. That is, we should understand that
the remedy given was wrong. Either it should be antidoted
at once, or give a more correct remedy, depending on the
nature of the new symptoms. (The 12th observation J. T.
Kent).
Also, if one or more very old symptoms, for which the
medicine was not given, reappear, it is a, proof that the medicine
has been the simillimum.
Later Constantine Hering formed a formula, that
1. the cure begins from the most important organs to lesser
important ones. i.e.
(a) from above downwards,
(b) from within outwards,
and
2. the cure begins in the reverse order of the appearance of

the symptoms.
This is also known as Hering’s law of cure.
Simple System: Preface to the 6th Edn., last paragraph.
“Thus homoeopathy is a perfectly simple system of medicine,
remaining always fixed in its principles as in its practice, which,
like the doctrine whereon it is based, if rightly apprehended will be
found to be complete (and therefore serviceable). What is clearly
pure in doctrine and practice should be self-evident.”
In other words, the homoeopathic system is simple because
it is based on “easily comprehensible principles.”
Single Simple Medicine: Please see page 145
Specific Medicine: “Contents—§ 147”;
Introduction; § 102, F.N. to § 102
‘The medicine most homoeopathically corresponding is the
most suitable, is the specific remedy.” § 147, Contents.
During an epidemic too, it is observed, that a particular
medicine is being indicated in at least most of the cases. It
happens, because—
(a) the cause of the disease is same, (generally an acute miasm),
(b) the phenomena (syndrome, i.e. a particular combination
of some symptoms (and or signs) too are almost the same,
and
(c) the cause overrules the individual capabilities
(susceptibilities) to fight the disease (otherwise, all these
persons would not have fallen sick together at the same
time).
The indicated medicine (in most of the cases) becomes

the specific remedy for this particular epidemic (the genius
epidemicus).
Hahnemann was never against the idea of specific medicines—
if it was possible. On the contrary he utilised every chance whenever
it was possible, to get a specific remedy for a particular disease-
condition. As for example in epidemic disease, in ever-continuing
endemic diseases, and in the recurring diseases—coming year
after year at a particular period, and at the very beginning of the
chronic diseases.
“We observe a few diseases that always arise from ONE AND
THE SAME CAUSE, e.g. the miasmatic maladies—hydrophobia,
the venereal diseases, the plague of the Levant, yellow fever,
small pox, cowpox, the measles, and some others, which bear
upon them the distinctive mark of always remaining diseases
of a PECULIAR CHARACTER, and because they arise from
a contagious principle that always remains the same, they also
always retain the same character and pursue the same course,
excepting as regards some accidental concomitant circumstances,
which however do not alter their essential character,”—
“These few diseases, at all events these first mentioned (the
miasmatic), we may therefore term specific, and bestow upon
them istinctive appellations.
“If a remedy have been discovered for one of these, it will
always be able to cure it; for such a disease always remains
essentially identical, both in its manifestations (the representatives
of its internal nature) and its cause.”
Medicine of Experience.
“He [Hahnemann] considered it a positive gain when morbid

states, hitherto regarded as individuals, could be referred to a
common type and treated by remedies chosen from a definite
group, instead of being made the subject of an indiscriminate
search throughout the Materia Medica.
“—He ever recognised that there were a certain number of
diseases of fixed type, acquiring this by origination from a specific
cause; and to these he appropriated one or more specific remedies,
as always applicable and usually indispensable.
R. Hughes
Lastly, Rau’s comment (published in 1824) is equally true
today, after more than 150 years. The so called ‘specific,’ of
the last century or of the present, were and are nothing but
homoeopathic medicines. In other words, if a drug, proves to
be specific for a disease-condition or a syndrome, the drug has
homoeopathicity to the disease-state, i.e. the drug is capable of
producing similar disease-condition in healthy human beings.
Whether it is acknowledged or not is a different question.
“Where experience showed the curative power of
homoeopathically acting remedies, whose mode of action could
not be explained, the difficulty was avoided by calling them
specific, and further investigation was stifled by this actually
unmeaning word, The homogeneous excitant remedies, the
specific (homoeopathic) medicines, however, had long previously
been prohibited as of very injurious influence.” in ‘On the Value
of the Homoeopathic Method of Treatment.’
St. Yve’s Salve: Please see page 42
Status Morbi (L): § 183
The disease-state, the condition of the disease.

Suppression: When the disease has changed place (whereas in
palliation it has not).
Surrogates: §§118,119; F.N. to § 119
Since there is no drug, whose action can be simulated in full
by any other drug, no drug can take the place of the other. (Only
one medicine can be the simillimum at a time, none else will act
equally well).
Supra (L): F.N. to 45 etc.
It means ‘above’
In the same way, ‘Vide Supra’ means ‘see above’.
Susceptibility: §§ 9—16; 30—33; 117 etc.
All the capabilities of man, inherent and acquired, are
combinedly known as his susceptibilities.
“By susceptibility we mean the general quality or capability of
the living organism of receiving impressions, the power to react to
stimuli. Susceptibility is one of the fundamental attributes of life.
Upon it depends all functioning, all vital processes, physiological
and pathological.”
S. Close
Every one is born with some inherent qualities. Of these
three are basic:
(a) the capability to acquire food and grow,
(b) the capability to reproduce, and
(c) the capability to defend one’s self.
There are other qualities too; of these the most important one
is the tendency to react against any stimulus, external or internal.
As man is inseparable from his environment, he is in the
continuous process of reacting spontaneously to his environmental
stimuli, consciously and unconsciously. Upon the successful
adjustment with these invading factors (agents) depends his well-
being. Whenever he is unsuccessful, he falls ill.
His defensive mechanism, an intimate part of all his
susceptibilities, is in the process of change, too, towards
betterment or otherwise. Let us take an example.
If a man’s system is ignorant of a noxious influence, and
how to combat it successfully, he is in the negative state of his
susceptibility to that particular influence. His system gets affected,
because it did not know how to keep the influence off, or how not
to get affected by it. The system reacts to it, and this is disease.
If during the process of illness, the system builds up a successful
defensive mechanism against the invading influence it gets cured.
It has now the positive susceptibility to the particular influence,
it is now immune to it.
§ 33 On the other hand, what if the system fails to build up the
defence, needed, against the morbific agent? This is why
we need the help of medicines. And this is the reason
that the medicines are “greatly superior” to the “natural
morbid stimuli” (natural disease producing forces). Not
only because “natural disease are cured and overcome by
suitable medicines”, but also because the medicines can
prevent diseases, (i.e. by building up immunity against
various diseases from before hand).
§ 33 It is due to the presence of the immunities, “that the morbific

noxious agents possess a power of morbidly deranging
man’s health that is subordinate and conditional, often
very conditional.” But when Hahnemann says, “whilst
medicinal agents have an absolute unconditional power,”
he only wants to mean, that the medicines affect people
much less conditionally compared to the noxious agents,
but not actually ‘absolutely unconditionally.”
Symptom: All through the book
“Proof of the presence of disease, usually subjective’;
sensory impression, but also by subjective symptoms of motor
expression.”
J. Krauss
Table of Contents:
The first edition of Organon did not contain any ‘CONTENTS’
or Table of contents. Only from the 2nd Edition onwards—
Hahnemann wrote the Table of Contents. It is valuable, because
it gives us the gist of the book prepared by Hahnemann himself.
As for example—
“§§ 80, 81. Psora; it is the mother of all true chronic diseases
except the syphilitic and sycotic.
NOTE—Name of diseases in the ordinary pathology.”
Or:
“§§ 272-274. Only one, single simple medicine should be given
to the patient at one time.”
Taking A Case: §§ 6, 84-99; 67, 82, 83;

(CASE TAKING;) 204-206; Chronic Diseases the Physician’s
first point (of the three) necessary for curing; The investigation
of disease.
§ 83 For case-taking or ‘This individualising examination of a
case of disease’ the physician should be free ‘from prejudice’,
and should have “sound senses, attention in observing and
fidelity.” [honesty]
§ 84 [a] “The patient details the history of his sufferings;
§ 6 [b] those about him tell what they heard him complain of,
how he has behaved and what they have noticed in him;
the physician
§ 6 [c] sees, hears, and remarks by his other senses what there is
of an altered or unusual character about him.”
But before everything the physician requests the patient to
speak slowly, so that he can write down everything important.
Then “he writes down accurately all that the patient and his
friends have told him in the very expressions used by them.” He
does not interrupt, “unless they wander off to other matters”,
because any interruption may break “the train of thought of the
narrators.” The physician, therefore, “keeping silence himself
allows them to say all they have to say.”
§ 85 Every new symptom should be written on a new line,
“separately, one below the other.” That is, enough space
should separate one symptom from the other, so that,
later, each symptom may be completed and added to, if
necessary.
§ 86 Each symptom is to be completed one after one, after the
patient has told everything. That is, the patient is asked
questions, so that ‘precise information’ in the fullest
possible details about each symptom, may be obtained.

And the details are mainly concerned with the type of
sensation, exact locations and all the circumstances which
modify each symptom. These modifications (aggravation
and amelioration) of each symptom are of the nature of
time, place, situation and circumstances.
§ 87 But the questions should never be suggestive of answer,
or such which may be answered simply by ‘yes’ or ‘no’
The questions should be framed rather so, as to extract
maximum information about the topic. If the patient
missed to say something,
§ 88 it should also be found out. The physical as also the mental
states (symptoms) both are important, and are to be
known.
§ 90 Then, it is to be ascertained, “how much of that [detail/
particulars] was peculiar to the patient in his healthy state”.
Full meaning of this sentence is, to treat acute diseases,
the peculiarities of the patent’s healthy state are to be kept
outside the totality of symptoms. Whereas—in case of
chronic diseases, the peculiarities of the healthy state are
to be included into the totality of symptoms.
(Please also see the last line of § 235)
§ 91 If some medicines have been taken already, only those
symptoms are true symptoms (of the picture) which were
present before taking medicine. In such cases, it is advised
to keep the patient without any medicine for some days,
to get the true picture of the disease.
§ 92 If, on the other hand, the disease condition be very acute
or serious in nature, all the symptoms available now
should be put together, and the most similar medicine

to this whole picture should be found out and given.
It would both cure the disease and neutralise the drugs
inappropriately given.
§93 New information about an ‘obvious cause’ may be found
out, if the patient or his friends are ‘questioned privately.’
Some will mention it spontaneously (of their own) and
some “when carefully-interrogated.”
§ 94 Accessory circumstances, if any, should be found out and
removed. (Please also see pages 47)
§95 Accessory symptoms of disease, if any, should also
be considered. (Please also see page 48).
§ 96 Some people exaggerate their symptoms (sufferings),
§ 97 while the others mimic, due to their inherent nature. They
are generally either hypochondriacs and hypersensitive
people or mild and shy and weak minded persons.
§98 The physician, therefore, must have the following extra
qualities to get the real, true but complete picture of the
disease:—
(a) especial circumspection
(b) tact
(c) knowledge of human nature (psychology)
(d) caution in conducting the inquiry, and
(e) patience in an eminent degree.
§ 99 In acute disease only it is easier than stated above to take
up a case. In the chronic disease conditions, but, the above
stated instructions are to be followed for success.
It is superfluous to add that the whole process is only to

individualise the disease, the person suffers from, as also to
individualise the medicine, the person requires for cure. And
one word more,
§ 206 “Before commencing the treatment of a chronic disease,
it is necessary to make the most careful investigation as
to whether the patient has had a venereal* infection (or
an infection with condylomatous gonorrhoea); for, then
the treatment must be directed towards this alone, when
only the signs of syphilis (or of the rare condylomatous
disease) are present, but this disease is very seldom met
with alone now-a-days.” etc.
§ 207 Then, the information about the medicines used already.
Medicine or medicines used may have to be antidoted,
if necessary. And it (such knowledge, if any) enables the
physician “to avoid the employment of medicines that
have already been improperly used.”
§ 208 Lastly, if there be no obstacle to be removed,
§ 209 the physician is to “elucidate the most striking and
peculiar (characteristic)** symptoms” so that he can select
“the first antipsoric or other remedy having the greatest
symptomatic resemblance for the commencement of the
treatment,”
In other words, “This embraces the art of the physician
securing the confidence of the patient and in drawing out from
him those subjective symptoms of mind, body and spirit that are
an integral part of the difficulty for which he seeks help.
* here Hahnemann means Syphilis.

** Please see § 153.
“It embraces also the art of observation of those observable

symptoms, plus the general atmosphere radiated by the patient,
that go to make up the objective symptoms in their widest sense.”
H. A. Roberts.
Taschenbuch Fuer Scheidekunst Und Apotheke (Gn.): Hand
book for (analytical) chemistry and pharmacy.
I Theil, dritte Ausgabe (Gn): F.N. to § 109
Part I, 3rd. Edition
III Theil, Zweite Ausgabe (Gn): F.N. to 109
Part III, 2nd. Edition
Tissue Change: § 279
The disease-condition can be cured, ‘’if the disease do not
manifestly depend on a considerable deterioration of an important
viscus (even though it belong to the chronic and complicated
diseases)” etc.
Totality of Symptoms: §§ 6, 7, 17, 18, 83, 84, etc.
The case; symptom picture, symptom-totality; symptom-
complex. The individuality of the case.
Sometimes it is also used as symptomatology, which is wrong,
Symptomatology means, ‘The science of symptoms and signs’.
The totality of symptoms is constructed from informations
received from three sources: The patient, his attendants and the
physician.
§§ 6, 84 (a) “The patient details the history of sufferings;

(b) those about him tell what they heard him
complain of, how he has behaved and what they
have noticed in him;
(c) the physician sees, hears, and remarks by his
other senses what there is of an altered or unusual
character about him.”
The physician may, to get other informations, if necessary, take
the help of other physicians, e.g. a pathologist (say, for some
laboratory finding) or a radiologist (for an X-Ray verification) etc.
But the accumulation of all the signs and symptoms is not,
or may not be, necessarily a totality of symptoms. Each sign and/
or symptom must fit with the rest of the symptoms so well, that
all together make a composite picture, which may be recognised
and utilised.
“The totality of symptoms is not only the sum total of
symptoms, but is in itself one grand symptom, the symptom of
the patient.”
Von Boenninghausen
“—the totality is simply the complete picture of the disease.
The totality is to the disease what the man, the ego, is to his
organism. It is that which gives individuality and personality.”
H. A. Roberts
Again, the totality is not only the picture of the disease,
the person suffers from, it is also the picture of the medicine,
the patient requires to get cured. This is only possible in the
homoeopathic system, since it has many drugs proved before

hand to compare with the disease. The totality of symptoms and
corresponding simillimum are only two pictures but most similar
to each other.
“the totality, which at the same time reveals both the remedy
and the disease.—The totality is related equally to the remedy
and to the disease.”
H. A. Roberts
Further, the symptoms of the present disease-condition are
not enough, particularly for chronic states. The peculiarities of the
healthy state before the disease, or in between the disease states, are
also to be added to the present picture. Because, this picture, now
available, is only a temporary phase of a long-continued process.
For the same reason, the family history, both paternal and
maternal, provides with some additional valuable informations. It
may be, more often it is so than not, that the person was already
diseased before he was born. The family history might supply not
only the disease-dyscrasia inherited, but also the ‘side effects’ (i.e.
ill effects) of the drugs used, and the effects of psycho-somatic
(physical-mental) trauma etc.
On the contrary, the totality should exclude the accidental
symptoms and symptoms due to maintaining cause etc., it is
superfluous to add.
To ton Rohon, Stalagma (Gk): F.N. to § 117
Rose-drop; Rose-water
Traite’ de l’Inoculation (Fr.): F.N. to § 46
A treatise on the Inoculation
Typus (L): Introduction, etc.

Please see page 42
Ueber die Erfahrung (Gn): Introduction
On the experience
Ueber die Kuhpockenimpfung, aus dem England mit
Zusaetzen (Gn.): F.N. to § 46
On the cow-pox inoculation, from England, with supplements.
Ueber den Werth des hom. Heilv. (Gn.)
F.N. to § 46
“The full from is Ueber den Werth des
homoeopathischen Heilverfahrens.
‘On the value of the homoeopathic medicines.’
Uebersicht der Hauptwirkungs-Sphaere der antip. Arz.
(Gn.): F.N. to § 154
The full form is—Uebersicht der Hauptwirkungs Sphaere
der antipsorischen Arzneien.
Consideration of the main spheres of action of the antipsoric
medicines.
Unguenta Nervina (L) Introduction

Please see page 42
Various Editions of Organon
It is not only useful to, but also obligatory on every one’s part
to, have an idea about the evolution of Organon. (for which please
set pages 4, 5 and 6)
The First Edition: It was published in 1810, from Torgau.
The name of the book was ‘Organon of the rational healing
science.’
The title page contained a stanza of Gellert* It contained
259 sections.
The Second Edition: It was published in 1819, from Leipzig.
The name was changed to ‘Organon of the healing art’:
The title page too contained only ‘Aude Sapere.’ It contained
318 sections. But the numeration was wrong. After §215 we find
§219. Hence the actual number of sections was 315. For the first
time the book contained a Table of Contents.
It was translated, (the first ever translation of Organon), by
Ernst von Brunnow into French, in 1824.
The Third Edition: It was published in 1824 from Koethen.
The name and the title page remained the same, as of the
2nd Edition.
It contained 318 sections, same as of the 2nd Edition, plus
2 extra sections on Mesmerism. But the wrong numeration was
not rectified. Hence it actually contained 317 sections.
* The Gellert’s stanza may be seen on page 2

The Fourth Edition: It was published in 1829, from Koethen.

The name and the title page remained unchanged. It
contained 292 sections.
It was translated by Charles H. Devrient, in English in 1833,
being the first ever english translation of Organon.
The Fifth Edition: It was published in 1833, from Koethen
The name and the title page remained same as before. It
contained 294 sections.
It was translated in English, by R.E. Dudgeon, in 1849, again
in 1893. It was also translated in English by C. Wesselhoeft.
The Sixth Edition:
It was completed in February, 1842 in Paris. But the
manuscripts could only be found out in 1920. The original
German edition was published by Richard Haehl in 1921; soon
after it the english translation by William Boericke appeared.
It contained 291 sections, and the name and title page too
were same as before.
The 1st edition of Organon was translated and published by
C.E. Wheeler in 1913.
Versuch einer homoeopathischen Therapie der
Wechselfieber (Gn): F.N. §§ 235
This work of von Boenninghausen means in english: —’An
attempt on a homoeopathic therapy of intermittent fever’.
Vide (L): At many places in footnotes ‘see’.
Vide Supra (L): At many places in footnotes ‘see above.’

Accessory Miasm: § 46
Or modified infectious/contagious principle.
If some germ is modified, it does not remain the same virulent
infective agent. For this very purpose the cow pox germs are not
utilised per se. These are diluted to be used as medicine, hence
called ‘accessory’ miasms. The cow-pox lymph is more so, because
of the presence of lymph of the cow and the preservative etc.
Contagium Vivum (L): ‘Chronic Disease’ and Lesser Writings.
Hahnemann mentions the miasms to be ‘contagium vivum’
(Latin), that is contagious living creatures.
Fixed Miasms: §§ 46, 73, 100, 103, F.N. 2 of Introduction
These are the germs, or miasms if you so please, which remain
almost the same; hence the diseases, too, produced by them remain
“invariably the same.”
§ 46—”those few diseases which are invariably the same, arise
from a fixed miasm, and hence merit a distinct name.
“Among these the smallpox— —:
“Thence arise fevers, in each instance of a peculiar nature, and,
because the cases of disease have an identical origin, they set up
in all those they affect an identical morbid process”—
§ 73 —“Sometimes they are peculiar acute miasms which recur
in the same manner, hence known by some traditional
name.”
General Symptoms: Throughout the book.
Hahnemann’s general symptoms are such symptoms, which

are found in almost every disease condition and in proving of
any drug. Such as—malaise, lethargy; aversion to physical and
mental work, headache, anorexia etc. These are generally found in
every disease condition hence so named, and are therefore least
important symptoms.
But these symptoms have been named by J.T. Kent as
common symptoms, since these are common to almost all disease
conditions and provings.
J.T. Kent’s general symptoms, are those, which belong to the
whole man, e.g. physical generals and mental symptoms etc.
Journal der praktischen Arzneikunde (Gn): F.N. to § 38
It means—Journal of the practical medicine.
Manifestations: Throughout the book.
Signs and symptoms.
Usus in Morbis (L): Or Clinical use
The clinical use of a medicine

(a) proves the symptoms of proving,
(b) helps get the medicinal symptoms, and
(c) may find the ‘clinical symptoms’ of this medicine.
ANTIPSORIC DRUG
Hahnemann’s antipsoric drugs are nothing but constitutional
drugs. The misunderstanding that antipsoric drugs are drugs
capable of curing non-venereal chronic diseases only (Tuberculosis,
Leprosy, Scabies and fungal infection etc.). This misunderstanding
may be removed by looking at the 48 drugs of chronic diseases,
their peculiar nature and their homoeopathic cure.
ANTIPSORIC DRUGS
This list contains among others - Aurum M, Hep. S, Kali
iod, Nitric Acid etc. These are mainly anti-syphilitics. There are
other drugs which are mainly antisycotic drugs. Yet these have
been named as anti-psorics. Nevertheless the meaning becomes
clear as soon as we appreciate that we treat a person suffering from
syphilis with antisyphilitic drugs - Hep s, Kal iod, Nitric Acid, or
Aurum etc. But his offspring showing the signs and/or symptom
of Aurum or Hep s or Kal iod or Nitric Acid the indicated drug
becomes its antipsoric drug or his/her constitutional drug. In
the same way when we treat a person suffering from acquired
Gonorrhoea with Puls, Clematis, Sil & Fl. ac. We are treating him
with an anti gonorrhoeal (or antisycotic), if you so please, drug.
But as soon as his son or daughter shows sign/symptom of Puls, or
Silica or Clematis, this indicated drug is called an antipsoric drug.
Intermittent Fever (Sec. 235-244)

As regarding one sided diseases, so called local diseases, mental
diseases, intermittent diseases and alternating diseases, so also
regarding intermittent fever, Hahnemann has given instructions
about how to treat them. This he did because these chronic
diseases were supposed to be very difficult to cure at that time.
(A) Intermittent fevers are mainly of 3 broad groups. 1st
-Sporadic or epidemic fever occuring out side endemic
marshy areas.
2nd - Individual suffering from fever.
3rd - People suffering from it in endemic areas, marshy
districts.
Intermittent fevers are of very many types. There may be
only 2 stages - cold/heat or heat/cold; or 3 stages - cold,
heat, sweat or it may consist of only one stage - cold, or
heat or sweat. Again the patient may have hot body yet
may feel chilly inside or may be cold out side, yet hot
inside. Naturally the treatment must be by such drugs
which have similar stages 1, 2, 3 or the other variety.
Again the most similar drug is found out by getting the
accessory symptom before, during or after the cold stage
or heat stage or sweat stage, i.e. diarrhoea, headache, colic
nausea etc. Further- the peculiar, individual symptoms
present during quiet stage (in between 2 attacks) will be
very helpful guide to get the very similar drug. Again the
time (hour) of the beginning of an attack will be further
helpful guide.
The drug should be selected from the apsoric group
of drugs (Ipecac, Ignatia, Gels etc.) but not psoric
(constitutional) drugs.
The administration of the drug should be in between

the paroxysms, or just after the end of the paroxysm if
the period of quietude be very short. The drug should be
repeatedly given (Hahnemann means the 50 millesimal
scale.)
It should be repeated after each attack. If given before
an attack it may endanger the patient’s life. If the patient
does not get cured he should be given Sulphur or Hepar
sulphuris calcarium in high potency (here he means 30
c).
If there be relapse, and if it is suspected that the patient
has contact with a marshy area, he should be advised to
go to a mountainous region.
Lastly, patients who have pernicious state of malaria,
due to either neglecting the disease at first, or due to
long continued crude doses of cinchona or its derivative
Quinine sulphate the patient should be given sulphur
or Hepar sulphur and should lead an orderly life. These
patients require long antipsoric treatment.
(B) Any individual suffering from ague will be cured by
treatment stated above. If it is suspected that he has contact
with a marshy area, he should be advised to move to a dry
area.
(C) People may remain healthy in marshy area (subject to
frequent floods) if they do not have a chronic disease and
lead a hygienic life. But people residing in an endemic
area suffer from intermittent fever, they should be given
Cinchona (China) at first, later they should be asked to
move to a dry area. But they will not be cured if antipsoric

treatment is not given.
“It is here,” Hahnemann says, “the official medicine
has achieved maximum result. Yet, because they do not
consider more than 4, 5, varieties e.g. quotidian. Tertian,
Quartan etc, therefore do not have different drugs for
various types, they give the same drug for long i.e.,
Cinchona bark extract in crude and large dose, the patients
go on to suffer from quinine drugging although cured of
the periodicity. The patients require long term treatment
for complete cure.
Transformation OF
HAHNEMANN’S IDEAS
By finding out the Drug proving process on the healthy bodies

of men and women, Hahnemann made the system of medicine
complete. Drug proving on healthy human beings was the last
missing link of the chain of system of medicine.
It would not be out of place to remind the incident known
as Cinchona bark experiment. While translating Wm. Cullen’s
materia medica from English to German, Hahnemann saw in a
Foot note that Cinchona bark extract taken by a healthy person
produced malaria like symptoms assuming that it was surely
Cullen’s mistake, since all have been curing malaria by Cinchona
bark extract. So he went to prove it. He took the extract in dram
doses for 3 days twice daily. He experienced most of the malaria
like signs and symptoms each time. Hence Cullen’s remark
was not wrong. The story would have ended then and there.
But another story began from the same moment. Hahnemann
argued - strange and unbelievable, yet it is true that cinchona
produces malaria like symptoms when taken by healthy person.
Is it an exception? He took another drug Arnica known at that
time to cure Ecchymosis from fall. He experienced similar signs
and symptoms and more. Hit in the arm he proved Rhus tox
and experienced many more symptoms that were produced by
merely touching poison ivy. Curing patients with the signs and
symptoms found during proving he became convinced that he
was discovering a method of curing disease never known before.
Henceforth each physician will be curing all patients confidently
and fully, if he had at his hand many drug’s proved on healthy
humans. From time onwards he was destined to do 2 types of
works: a) to prove drugs’ (and record the signs and symptoms’)

and b) write books containing the directions how to use them
safely, most helpfully and confidently. After 6 yrs. we see his ‘New
principle for ascertaining the curative power of drugs’ in 1796.
After another 9 years we find ‘Medicine of Experience’ side by
side of provings of 27 drugs, named Fragmenta. This materia
medica containing proving of 27 drugs has been the first ever pure
effects of drugs published in the world. He continued to do 2
things as stated above and in 1810 he published the Organon of
medicine 1st Edition, improved and enlarged edition of medicine
of Experience. Along with almost from 1811 the materia medica
pura began to be published having provings of 67 drugs. As in
1819, 2nd edition of organon of medicine got published, the 2nd
edition of materia medica too was published. In 1821, shifting
to Koethen also did not stop Hahnemann from proving. The
organon of medicine being popular, the 3rd edition of it was
published in 1824. In 1827, he found out the peculiar nature
of chronic diseases and their cure by Homoeopathy. From 1828
he began publishing provings of such 48 drugs which could cure
chronic disease. He also found that the Vital principle cannot cure
the chronic disease itself, that is without the help of medicines.
The 4th edition of organon of medicine was published in 1829
and the 5th edition of it appeared in 1833. In 1828, the Chronic
diseases was seen. The 2nd edition of the ‘Chronic Diseases” was
completed and published in 1838. It contained 48 drugs capable
or curing the Chronic Diseases. Lastly in 1841, the 6th edition of
organon of medicine was completed. It was written in 2 languages
German and French.
In the period of 50 years Hahnemann had proved 100
drugs of which provings of 99 drugs was published. He died
before he could publish the proving of his last i.e. 100th drug
PSORINUM
POTENCY AND REPETITION

Beginning from the crudest (drops and grains) doses Hahnemann
began to minimize the amount of each dose. Because he saw that
more minuter the dose, lesser side effects of the drug, although
the disease condition was cured. Slowly he noticed that the
minimising process which was by adding a vehicle and mixing by
inserting force dry substances were triturated with sugar of milk
in mortar and pestle and liquids with alcohol and succussing the
phial upon an elastic but hard substance. Gradually he noticed
that by doing so, new qualities of the drug were released. He
named it dynamisation.
At first the drugs were potentised in Decimal scale (1:10)
then in centesimal scale (1:100) and at last in 50 millesimal scale
(1:50,000). He had used all the potencies (Q/1x, 6x/3c, 6c, 9c,
12c, 15c, 18c, 21c, 24c, 27c and 30c) of all the drugs.
Thereafter he advised to give a dose of the indicated drug
and to wait till the action of the dose completely exhausted. The
directed procedure was began from the 1st edition of organon of
medicine to the 5th edition of organon. He changed the procedure
in the theoretical part of “The Chronic Diseases”. He says to
minimise the period of suffering give the medicine in water,
once, twice daily for a few days if need be. He further changed
the directions in his last edition the 6th. His last advice is to give
the medicine in acute disease conditions, acute exacerbation of
chronic diseases and primary stage of chronic diseases daily and
repeatedly, because these are prepared in the 50 millesimal scale
therefore very low potencies.
LIST OF REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Organon der Heilkunst - S. Hahnemann Gn.
Editor R. Haehl.
2. Do Do Do Gn. - Hochstetter
3. Do Do Do 6th Edn. - Editor W. Boericke
4. Do Do Do 5th Edn. E - Editor R. E. Dudgeon
5. Do Do Do E - Editor C. Wessel Hoeft
6. Do Do Do 6th Edn. E - Editor P. J. Kuenzli
7. Do Do DO 5th Edn. E - Editor C. A. Baldwin
8. Do Do Do 1st Edn. E - Editor C. E. Wheeler
9. Translation of all Non English
Texts in Organon E - R. R. Joardar
10. Dictionary of Homoeopathy E - R. R. Joardar
11. Lectures on Homoeopathic Principle E - R. E. Dudgeon
12. S.Hahnemann Life & Works E - R. Haehl
13. Principle & Practice E - R. Hughes
14. A Brief Study Course E - Elizabeth Wright H.
15. Homoeopathy & Hom. Prescribing E - H. Farrington
16. Lectures on Homoeo. Phil. E - J. T. Kent
17. The Principles and Art of cure by hom. E - H.A. Roberts
18. Genius of Hom. E - Stuart Close
19. Preface to Therapeutic Pocket E - H. A. Roberts &
Book of Boenninghausen A. C. Wilson
20. Hom. the Science of Therapeutics - C. Dunham.
21. Divided legacy E - H. L. Coulter
22. Hom. Science & Mod. medicine - H. L. Coulter
23. Hahnemann’s Miasms E - M. L. Tyler
24. Pharmacodynamics - R. Hughes
25. On the value of Symptom - R. G. Miller
26. The Critique of Hom. - O. Lesser
27. On the value of Symptom - R. G. Miller
PREFACE
This third part completes the Dictionary of Organon &

appears by the Grace of God, at last. The author acknowledges
with gratitude the blessings of our most revered and capable
teachers, namely - Drs. N.M. Chowdhury, Jnan Majumdar, G.
Dirghangi, S.N. Sengupta, Ashru Bindu Dutta, M.B. Dasgupta.
B. Roy Chowdhury, Tinkori Chatterjee, A.K. Roy Chowdhury,
J.N. De and a score of others. They not only created interest
in the subjects they taught, but also helped us grow the habit
of studying on our own. We remain grateful also because they
enthused us to do some original work & gave hints about how
to do them, and what to do.
We remain grateful to those seniors, who, though not our
teachers, helped us with advises & suggestions, Of them we name
only a few, e.g. - Drs. Netai Ch. Chakraborty, S.K. Das, J.N.
Kanjilal & Sripati Mondal.
We thank our Colleagues Dr. Bhola Nath Chakraborty &
Chitta Ranjan Adhya among others, for various reasons. Both have
stopped us from writing cheap books, viz Questions & Answers
& the like and appreciated both the books, the Translation’ and
this ‘Dictionary.’ They have also suggested for 2/3 new books, one
of which is in making. We thank also our juniors like Dr. Moni
B. Bose and others and Dr. L.M. Khan. The former suggested
some topics to be included into this book & the latter procured
for us a few out of print/out of market books.
It would be folly not to mention those students without whose
constant requests, rather goadings, this book couldn’t have been
finished. We are sorry we cannot name them, since their number

is, in the course of 40 yrs., a legion.
Lastly thanks are due to my wife Dr. Mrs. Chhaya Joardar,
for her constant help from many sides. As also she painted the
portrait of Hahnemann; a photo copy of which is inserted.
The author remains grateful to all the Authors and Authorities
on Hahnemann, Homoeopathy, and Organon, from whom he
has drawn rather liberally; acknowledges thereby their individual
contributions to homoeopathy, as also expresses his gratitude to
their respective publishers.
Apologies for errors, which might have crept in, despite best
efforts.
10.4.81 R. R. JOARDAR
BASIS
Basis and Sources of ‘Hering’s Law of Cure’

(Theoretical part of the chronic Diseases, page 230 etc.)
Who wrote for the first time, you think, “the latest symptoms
that have been added to a chronic disease–are always the first to
yield in an antipsoric, but the oldest ailments–are the last to give
way”?
Why, Hahnemann indeed; and this is an original observation
of Hahnemann. No body observed it, or wrote so, before him.
Again, the ‘cure begins from within outwards’ too had been
written by Hahnemann. He says “–in the case of ever so slight an
improvement we observe a greater degree of comfort increased
calmness and freedom of the mind, higher spirits” etc. and “the
physical improvement comes later.” If somebody, on the other
hand, try to mean by this proposition that the cure begins from
the internal and vital organs and the external and less vital organs
(viz; skin) become trouble free at last – well, this is indeed one
of the main objectives of Hahnemann’s theory of the chronic
diseases. Therefore it is that he forbade external applications,
lest the external manifestations, which are part and parcel of the
economy’s defensive activities, are driven to the internal, vital
parts.
It is true that the ‘cure begins from within outwards’ was
observed and written by Paracelsus* before Hahnemann.
* Paramirum.
Lastly, that the cure begins from above downwards’ was

originally observed by Hippocrates**. Celsus too quoted
Hippocrates–. “If the disease spread below. It is a good sign,”
Hence this observation has been well known from Hippocrates
‘downwards’.
The laws of cure, under discussion, were observed originally
by Hippocrates, Paracelsus and Hahnemann. We are grateful,
nevertheless, to Hering (Hahnemann’s right hand and the most
capable disciple, follower and innovator) that he brought these
observations to our notice.
BASIC PRINCIPLES OF HOMOEOPATHY

Homoeopathic system of medicine has a set of rules, mostly
founded upon nature’s laws, to guide each physician to get
the best possible results in each case. Below are shown some
of the basic principles upon which the science and art of the
Homoeopathic system of medicine are based, The principles,
though shown separately one by one, are but intimately related
to each other to form a complete whole of the theory and practice
of Homoeopathy.
If we are to treat scientifically we must have at hand the
provings of many drugs on healthy men & women. To cure each
and everyone permanently we are to follow the rule of similia.
If Similar medicine is to be given it is to be in minimum dose,
sufficient to bring reaction, especially because a drug is foreign
to the body, therefore, poison, and if similar medicine is to be
given in small doses, only one medicine can be given to achieve
the optimum and so on.
** Prognosticon
Again—the Homoeopathics, the science and Art of

Homoeopathy, asserts that a system of medicine must have some
principles to be followed without whose practical guidelines
nobody can get the best possible help needed.
1. DRUG PROVING [Testing of drugs on healthy human
being]
It is the only scientific and rational method of ascertaining
the pure effect of medicine. It is to unlock the sphere of action of
every substance in nature, so far as it can bear any relation to man’s
constitution in health and disease. To practice Homoeopathy (or
for that matter any system of medicine) a physician must have
the pure effects of many drugs on various types of healthy man
& woman at hand before any thing. Without this nobody can
confidently treat even a single patient, not to speak of curing him.
Because Samuel Hahnemann proved 100 drugs it was
possible for him to found a system of medicine for the first time
in history. Due to him and after him many more medicines have
been proved, yet his endeavours will remain as the beginning of
a science of therapeutics in the whole history of mankind. This is
his most constructive and creative work and most revolutionary
reform, of fundamental importance, brought in medicine.
Proving of Drugs on healthy human beings, therefore, is the
first and foremost basic principle universal in its application and
true for all time.
2. THE LAW OF SIMILIA—(Selection of medicine
according to its symptom similiarity, or Homoeopathicity to the
disease condition).
Ayurveda of India knew and practiced the treatment by

similars at least from 3600 years before today. Hippocrates long
after, wrote ‘if it be a curable case treat it by similars, Similia
Similibus curantur. On the other hand if it be an incurable case
treat it by contraries—Contraria contrariis curantur.’ These were
Hippocrates’ directives.
Most of the physicians forgot him or did not care to follow
him. Specially since C. Galen. Yet there have been physicians, all
along, who have been observing, that to cure quickly, permanently
and confidently similia is the best way, nay the only way out. The
most powerful and prominent among them have been Celsus and
the empirical group of physicians and Paracelsus. Hahnemann,
but changed hippocrates’, strong order into a milder one.
He said Let Similars be treated by Similars—Similia Similibus
curentur; There are reasons why he did so.
First—although most of the disease conditions are to be
treated by similars, to be cured, there are some exceptions
too, however rare, to this rule. There are some types of disease
conditions where antipathy may have to be done.
(a) poisonings e.g. Acids by alkalies and vice versa; antidoting
other poisons.
(b) emergency cases e.g. by drowning, on being frozen etc.,
and
(c) the incurable cases going to be fatal very soon.
Second—Even the physical laws are at best proximate laws.
We should not, rather cannot, be too strict to form a rigid law,
specially because we are dealing with living men, each differing
from the rest in some way or the other.
Third—Homoeopathy is not more than a set of rules of

practice—All collected from practical experience. At best the
exception contraria contrariis curantur proves the rule—The
similia similibus.
Lastly, Hahnemann was neither prejudiced against contraria
contrariis nor prejudiced for similia. He knew and wrote that truth
can be found through pure experience. His medical experience
of long 64 years directed him to modify the strong directive into
a milder one.
Again that is the reason why he wrote in Section 2”—on
easily comprehensible principles” whose implications are simple.
Along with similia, contraria is an extra weapon necessary in some
exceptional cases. On the other hand, indeed, true or proper
natural disease conditions, acute or chronic, can be cured by
similia only, even when the cases, which seem to be incurable
and are going to be fatal soon, may be more helped by similar
medicines than by the palliatives. Moreover, the similar medicines
almost always enlighten life along with giving relief. Also it is
almost impossible to know which case is really an incurable one,
since the curability or incurability of a case is mostly decided
by our upto date experience. Hence it is always wise to treat by
similars, except in poisonings or in emergency cases.
3. THE LAW OF MINIMUM DOSES (Treatment by
potentised drugs).
Minimum dose is not mere attenuation nor dilution of dose.
It means much more. Never the less, Hahnemann primarily began
with minimising the dose, with a vehicle mixed with it, just to
avoid the bad effects of drugs. Slowly it became clear to him,
in a course of quite a few years, that by thoroughly mixing the
medicinal substance with a vehicle in a mathematico-mechanical

process (trituration/ succussion) the substance is not only diluted
or attenuated but it acquires some new capabilities never observed
before. This he named, therefore, potentisation or dynamisation.
The need of the minimum dose is three fold.
(a) each medicinal substance is foreign to the body, therefore
a poison, hence lesser the amount of it be given the better.
(b) The highly toxic, insoluble and inert substances may, only
often being so prepared, be used as medicines and
(c) Later Maupertius found the nature’s law, the law of the
least plus and substantiated Hahnemann’s scientificity of
the minimum dose, potentisation.
The utilities of potentising drugs are the following:
(a) It turns the highly poisonous/toxic substances into drugs,
hence usable as drugs.
(b) It renders insoluble substances into solubles, only then
they may be used as drugs, and
(c) It transforms inert, apparently non-medicinal, substances
into highly potent ones.
Hundreds of such substances, which were never thought
to be usable as medicines, are being used as medicines. Lastly
more potentised a drug, for longer time it acts. But all this does
not necessarily exclude the use of the crude drugs whenever it is
possible and necessary.
This is Hahnemann’s second great contribution to medicine
and is of fundamental importance.
4. THE LAW OF SIMPLEX (use of only one drug at a time)

There are very natural, as also practical, reasons why only one
drug should be used at a time. Hahnemann said “Nature likes
simplicity and effects much with one remedy; but you do little
with many”; ‘Imitate Nature,’ Nature never uses the same mould
twice. Further,
(a) If more than one drug is administered at a time, one may
antidote another &/or
(b) One may mix with another to form a new substance,
whose actions will be more unknown. Whichever the case
we remain in the dark always about any drug’s capabilities.
(c) And even if a drug of the mixture acts, we do not know
which one acted. On the other hand because drugs are
proved always singly, we know each one’s pure and smallest
effect/change in the patient, good or bad, immediately and
can take appropriate steps whenever necessary. Further,
even if there be more than one disease-condition in a
patient only one disease is expressed at a time, so long as
the patient is curable. This is the nature of the Nature.
Only in incurable cases it is observed that all the diseases
present are acting simultaneously. This being the order
observed in nature, Homoeopathy follows her directions.
Lastly, however big a symptom-totality be in a patient, it
can be covered by one medicine. There are drugs which
have produced and therefore, can cure over 3000 signs/
symptoms.
5. THE DOCTRINE OF VITAL PRINCIPLE (The
knowledge about the whole, the importance of mental aspect etc.)
Since introduced in the 4th edition of his organon of medicine

Hahnemann made the system of medicine dynamic.
The need and utilities of the knowledge about the vital
principle/life principle are the following.
(a) It helps us conceive each man as a whole, be in health or
in disease condition. There is no local disease whatsoever.
(b) It helps us understand and appreciate the importance of
mental aspect of man. Without appreciating which no
man can be understood fully, to be helped effectively.
(c) It helps to comprehend the dynamic nature of man
far from being a mere material make up of various
substances only. Pathology begins from the very moment
an individual begins to feel not at ease. If treated only at
this stage the disease may be nipped in bud. Prevention
is possible now and is better than cure.
(d) It helps us understand clearly that this is the factor which
actually gets cured.
The stress is, therefore, given more on raising the standard
of man than on drugs. For both prevention and cure of diseases,
medicines are only indirectly responsible, whereas the man
himself raises his standard of defensive mechanism to get cured
directly; indeed, with the help of medicines. Only by appreciating
the importance of each one’s life principle and its activities, it is
possible to create and maintain the ideal relation between him
and his environment most successfully. Only by knowing him so
his reaction (Fever, inflammation etc.) are appreciated to be his
constructive and curative endeavours, and are never suppressed
in any way. Only by working with, and never against, the vital
principle a man may be given the best possible help ever. This
is the ecology of medicine. A similar medicine stimulates the

defensive & curative activities to win over the morbific force.
6. THE DOCTRINE OF CHRONIC DISEASES,
(The chronic diseases, their peculiar nature and how to treat
them)
This is Hahnemann’s finishing touch to make this system full
proof and it is also of fundamental importance. Many years of
careful observations revealed to Hahnemann that this therapeutic
system lacked the final coping stone. He came to the conclusion
that—all chronic diseases of man have their fundamental origin
firmly established in chronic miasms by which means—their
parasitical existence in the human organism can be continually
strengthened and increased. Also a chronic disease is chronic
mainly because of a failure on the part of the system involved to
carry resistance to victory. Also, such a fault may be inherited by
the next generation if left untreated.
In short his conclusions are:
(a) Chronic diseases are caused by contagious/infectious,
‘living animalcules’ (contagium vivum) of chronic nature.
(b) These can never be cured by the person’s own capabilities
i.e. without the help of the medicines, and.
(c) These are transmitted into the next generations, if left
untreated.
These he differentiated from acute miasmatic diseases and
these need, therefore, some special treatment with such drugs only
which have much deeper and longer actions than the others. Such
medicines are named antipsoric, anti-syphilitic and antisycotic
medicines according to their natures. Without the knowledge
of the above it is impossible to cure each and every chronic case

radically and permanently. There are other implications too. For
example, the natural eruptions and/or secretions of the miasmatic
diseases should never be suppressed; since it is always killing in
nature and it shows a reciprocal relation between the skin and the
internal organs, as also between the skin and outer environment.
The skin is equally, if not more, important part of the living man
as any other vital part of him, nervous, cardiovascular, respiratory,
endocrinal etc.
7. THE INDIVIDUALISTIC APPROACH Pg. 72 (Each
person is a new person and different from the rest of mankind)
Another innovation of Hippocrates reintroduced by
Hahnemann and this individualising approach is the very basis
of the Homoeopathics and is the hub around which the system
revolves. No two persons are ever alike. There is no guarantee,
therefore, that a measure helpful to one will be helpful to the other.
Even logically it is wrong to say a particular drug will be
equally helpful to one and all. On the contrary a drug curative
for one may be injurious to other. “One man’s meat is another’s
poison.” —Hippocrates.
Therefore in medical point of view, there are no substitute
remedies whatsoever, no surrogates. Again, even the diagnosis
of a disease condition involves the process of individualisation
distinguishing it from the rest of the similar disease conditions.
Further, this disease condition too has to be individualised to
appreciate how this individual is reacting against the disease
producing agent. Lastly the individual too has to be diagnosed
that is to be individualised, of which type this person is who is
failing to adjust with the environmental factors, which mean the

disease causative agents both external and internal.
Without apprehending all these factors we cannot do
maximum good to each and every individual rapidly gently and
permanently.
Please also see individualisation pg 116, and Individualistic
approach Pg 72. Part II
Basis of KENT’S TWELVE OBSERVATIONS

Very like ‘Hering’s law of cure’ Kent’s observations too are
actually Hahnemann’s observations. We still are grateful to
Kent, since he collected these from ‘Organon of Medicine’ and
theoretical part of ‘Chronic Diseases’ .......... These are arranged
in such a manner that it is easier to remember. Below are shown
the sources from where the observations have been collected.
Obs. I: Chronic Diseases; Page 205, 2nd para 1st lines, §§
255, 276, 279
II: Chronic Diseases; page 205, 2nd para 1st lines, §255
III: §§ 157 to 161, F.N. to 282
IV: §§ Do , §§ 156, 159, 253
V: Chronic Diseases; Page 223, 1st lines, § 256
VI: Do; page 216-1st para, page 217-1st line, F.N. § 252
VII: § 279
VIII: Chronic Diseases: Page 219, 2nd para
IX: §§ 105-145
X: Chronic diseases; page 204, 3rd para, § 249
XI: Do; page 204, 2nd para.
XII: Do; page 230, § 256

There may be other observations too, e.g. Although the
patient feels better, the pathological condition is abnormal—even
compared to his/her normal condition. But that is a different story.
HAHNEMANN’S CONTRIBUTION TO MEDICINE

1. He proved 100 drugs, He published provings of 99 drugs.
The proving of the 100th drug namely psorinum was not
published before his death. By proving many drugs on
healthy human beings, both men and women, he made
the system complete, independent and scientific.
2. He discovered for the first time the potentiation
(dynamisation/potentisation) of drugs, in a way which
simultaneously minimises the drug substances ad-
infinitum, yet preserving the individual qualities of drugs
and liberating capabilities of the drugs. By this discovery
he broadened the scope of medicine vastly, and he made
the system science fostering.
3. He for the first time differentiated true Sycosis (Gonococcal
gonorrhoea/specific Gonorrhoea) from Syphilis. Before
him this was thought to be the same venereal disease.
4. He found out for the first time that the true/proper chronic
diseases can never be cured without the help of medicines.
5. He stressed the need of special and “different group of
drugs for curing true chronic diseases, and he named them.
6. He observed for the first time that after the administration
of the curative drug, the last appearing symptoms/signs
go away first and the first appearing symptoms/signs go
away at last.
7. After the administration of the curative drug psychologically

the patient feels relieved and fortified to stand the
disease process more easily, a part of the homoeopathic
aggravation. There are quite a few other novelties too, e.g.
8. Possibility of curative treatment, even without the
knowledge of the causative factors. The above said reforms
brought in are the major contributions to medicine by
Hahnemann.
9. He advocated the humane and humanitarian treatment
and behaviour towards the mentally deranged persons.
10. Over and above all these, he reintroduced the prime need
of the law of similia, and importance of the knowledge
of vital principle, the law of simplex, minimum dose,
primary and secondary actions of medicine and cure
begins from within outwards, and from above downwards
etc. of Hippocrates, the Empiricists and Paracelsus etc.
The appreciation and originality of the above contributions
may be seen please in the Appreciations. (Dictionary of
Homoeopathy)
DRUG RELATIONSHIP
The relation between any two proved drugs is one of the 5
following types. Although the list of drugs is growing all along,
through clinical experience, yet the types are:
(A) Same origin (cognates) They do not follow each other
nor they antidote each other, e.g. Nux. Vom. and Ignatia;
(Cognates).
(B) Different origin
1. Concordants: They are different in origin, yet similar

in action and they follow each other well, e.g. Sepia
and Nux Vom., Sulph and Aconite;
2. Complementary: One completes the action of the
previous medicine
(a) Acute which began a cure, but was unable
to effect it fully. Generally a complementary
medicine is a chronic which removes the bad
effects of the previous medicine if any, e.g. Bell
+ Calc c; Aloe + Sulph; Merc + HSC
(b) But it may be an acute too. e.g. Nux v. after
Sepia; Acon, after Sulph.; etc.
(c) Series Sulph, Calc, Lyco. and Thuja, Nitric Acid,
Hep, S.C etc.
3. Antidotes: It Neutralises the action of the previous
medicine e.g.
(i) Camphor to many medicines of vegetable origin,
(ii) Hep. s to many medicines of metallic origin etc.
4. Inimical: Incompatible; the relation of enmity, hence
one does not follow or precede the other without
more or less damaging the patient or worsening the
case, e.g. Apis & R. T.; Phos & Causticum; China
& Psorinum; Acids & Venoms etc.
5. Compatibles: Medicines which may be used before
or after one another.
FOODS AND DRINKS IN HOMOEOPATHY

Aphorisms 258 to 263 and Foot Notes
Diet is the second best weapon next only to medicine in
importance, to a physician. Only appropriate food and drinks
would help patients win over disease and regain health. Let us
first note what Dr. Hahnemann says about diet.
1. The patients suffering from acute disease conditions
should be given what they strongly desire to drink,
especially if the craving be new and has appeared along
with the disease condition. On the other hand the articles,
which the chronic patients strongly want, should be
minimised as far as possible, or modified according to
need.
These are Hahnemann’s very practical observations and are
of immense value.
Hippocrates too had said: “For extreme disease extreme
strictness of treatment is necessary including diet and regimen.”
Apart from Hahnemann’s list of foods, the following would
be of help.
2. The particular food or drink should be avoided which
would neutralise the medicine administered. For
Example—
(a) Camphor* peppermint* or menthol etc, antidote
many medicines.
(b) Acids when the patient is on Aconite, Arum triph,
and many other drugs of vegetable kingdom. [It
* Provided one is allowed to list these under food items.

would do well to remember also articles of daily use

like tooth paste and powders containing peppermint/
menthol or camphor also peppermint lozenges and
Aqua Ptychotis (Ajowan) and the like.]
3. Foods which are inimical to particular drugs or persons
should be stopped.
For example—
(a) Onions while the patient is on Thuja Occ.
(b) Oysters while the patient is on Lyco., Aloe
(c) Cabbage while the patient is on Petroleum,
(d) Butter milk while the patient is on Cobalt.
(e) Honey while the patient is on Natrum Carb.
(f ) Eggs while the patient is on Ferrums & Colchicum.
(g) Acids while the patient is on Lachesis & Other
Venoms
(h) Potatoes while the patient is on Alumina.
(i) Coffee while the patient is on Causticum & Psorinum
(j) Wine* while the patient is on Selenium, Conium
(k) Strawberry while the patient is on Arn, Oxalic acid.
(l) Salt - while the patient is on Podo & Hg.
4. Particular food or drink should be given which would help
the patient suffering from particular disease condition as
aids or for cleansing the system.
Apart from water:
(a) Radishes for uric acid/Lithic diathesis.
* Provided one is allowed to list these under food/drinks items

(b) Milk for tobacco, alcohol addictions.

(c) Butter milk for amoebiasis or giardiasis.
(d) Alcoholic stimulants while the patient is on
Gelsemium etc.
5. Foods may act as antidotes—
(a) Sour apples/vinegar—in tobacco poisoning, Sausage,
anaesthetic vapour, stings & bites.
(b) Cheese—in indigestion from strawberry, tomato,
oysters.
(c) Salt—in indigestion from curd, plantains.
(d) Plantains—in indigestion from Jack fruit.
(e) Alcohol*—in snake poisoning and sudden chills.
(f ) Strong black coffee, hot, in large number of poisons
specially narcotics.
(g) Green tea, tea—in fatty condition with cardiac
involvement, and Thalassaemia
(h) Cocoa—in high altitude dyspnoea.
6. Diet may often replace medicine. For example, by
supplying foods containing vitamins and mineral salts
in deficiency disease conditions without basic defect in
assimilation, These are rather well known.
This article does not intend to supply complete list of food
articles or of drugs related thereto, The list may, or rather should,
be vastly improved upon. It is only an idea. Vide: A brief study
course in Homeopathy, Elizabeth Wright.
EVOLUTION OF ORGANON OF MEDICINE

In the year 1796, in the article named ‘A new principle for
ascertaining the curative powers of drugs......., Hahnemann said
that to cure chronic diseases we need similar medicines. 1796,
therefore, may be called the birth year of Homoeopathy: in the
sense that patients were being cured by proved drugs according
to law of similia.
In ‘Medicine of Experience’ 1805 he said that to cure diseases,
acute and chronic, we need a similar medicine. This book is the
precursor one of ‘Organon of Medicine’, because most of the
topics of it are seen in the 1st edition of Organon of Medicine.
In the very first edition he mentioned about organism or Body
(Koerper) or state of health (Befinden) only in § 21 etc.
In the 2nd edition he mentions about over & above organism
etc. also ‘life preserving power’ in § 25.
Table of content is introduced.
In the 3rd edition which is a reprint of the 2nd edition, there
is no change, except inclusion of mesmerism.
In the 4th edition we see introduction of ‘vital power’ and
‘animal vital force’. Introduction of theory of chronic Diseases.
In the 5th edition we find simply ‘vital force’ (Lebenskraft)
and ‘immaterial being’, Dynamis in F.N. to § 29 & many places.
Drug dynamisation is introduced.
In the 6th edition we see ‘Life principle (Lebens prinzip)
and vital force of the life principle’ too. 50 millesimal Scale is
introduced; also lowest potencies in the beginning of Chronic
diseases and in repeated doses are introduced.
Also all the disparaging adjectives applied to the vital force in

the earlier editions are generally omitted in the 5th edition. And
positive role of vital force is admitted.
In the 6th edition too most of the disparaging adjectives are
omitted and the positive role of the vital principle is admitted.
In the previous editions he used derogatory adjectives because,
the True chronic diseases can not be cured by vital principle alone
i.e. without the help of medicines.
It was his discovery and he had every right to mention it,
hence the disparaging adjectives. Yet ultimately it is the vital
principle which cures the diseases although with the help of
medicine, hence omission of the derogatory adjectives. He had
said in the F.N. to § 29 (4th edition) as also later. “It is always the
vital force that conquers................. It is the organic vital force
of our bodies which itself cures natural diseases of all kinds, in a
direct manner” etc.
It would be relevant here to mention also the best possible
attempt to explain how, perhaps, (“most probably” §§ 28, 29, in
5th & 6th edition) the medicines cure the diseases.
The medicines—‘by degrees cause and compel this instinctive
vital force gradually to increase its energy and to go on always
increasing it more and more, until at length it becomes much
stronger than the original disease...............” to regain health.
SHORT HISTORY OF HOMOEOPATHY

Treatment by similar is not new. It is as old as civilisation
Records are available from the time of Sushruta, 19th to 18th
century B.C. who proclaimed Samah samam shamayati, similars
cure similars. The history of western medicine begins with
Hippocrates 5th century B.C. He wrote, through the like disease
is produced and through application of the like it is cured”. “The
physis (vital principle) is always the physician in case of disease”.
“Recognition of the propria (individual symptoms), deviating
from the communia (average/common symptoms) of the disease
is the method; Aim of therapy is to assist the organism, to combat
the disease along the lines already selected by the organism”,
etc. 8 books written by him form the kernel of the Corpus
Hippocraticum, the Hippocratic works, consisting of 70 books,
and the rest 62 books written by his followers, who remained
anonymous, have been divided into groups II, III and IV. All
these books were written in the course of less than a century, and
the groups follow in chronological order. Group II writers and
specially the group IV writers not only followed Hippocrates but
also refuted the opinions of Group III writers, who had opined in
the meantime that cure can only be given by contraries. Moreover
the authors of ‘Ancient medicine’, ‘The Art’ and ‘Places in man’,
all of the 4th century B.C. improved upon Hippocrates’ system
tremendously both theoretically and practically.
In the meantime grew a new school known as the Empirics,
These physicians not only followed Hippocrates’ system (treatment
by similars) but added to it many more new things. They coined
the word syndrome, defined a few syndromes; introduced for the
first time the idea of scientific approach, scientific method and
scientific investigation; found out quite a few similar specifics and
made the practice more sound and scientific. The Hippocratics

cum Empirics reigned supreme for long 700 years from 4th
century B.C., to 3rd century AD. Most notable empirics were
Herophilos, Pyrrho, Celsus, Arcesilaus, Carniades, Aenesidemos
and Sextus Empiricus. As because S. Empiricus collected, collated
and arranged all the writings from Hippocrates upto his time, the
system was named after him, as Empiric medicine.
Some of Hippocrates’ sayings are—

1. “Through the like disease is produced and through
application of the like it is cured.
2. The complaints of the sick are also healed by means of
opposing methods.
3. The physis (V.P.) is always the physician in case of disease.
4. I however, consider it right to see the whole, no disease is
local.
5. See not the disease but the diseased individual.
6. Disease is not an entity, it is a process.
7. Recognition of the propria (individual symptoms)
deviating from the communia (average/common
symptoms), of the disease is the method.
8. Aim of therapy is to assist the organism to combat the
disease along the lines selected already by the organism.
9. Stress on not diagnosis but on prognosis, since medicine
is science of healing and disease is a process, never static.
10. No explanation, but phenomena and detailed description
of individual case are needed.
11. All modifying influences of the human environment are

important and are to be corrected whenever necessary.
12. The organism is composed of undefined number of
humours and cure is achieved through coction (over
powering/maturation), of the abnormal humours by the
organism itself and its evacuation is done through sweat,
stool, urine, sputum etc.
13. “One man’s meat is another’s poison”. (Individualisation)
14. Of two pains occurring together not in the same part of
the body, the stronger weakens the other. Hiccough is
ameliorated by inducing sneezing.
15. Cold water causes convulsions, tetanus, rigor and stiffness
and in another suffusion with cold water in tetanus will
restore the natural warmth. Again
16. Cold things such as snow and ice cause haemorrhages,
and yet cold water is to be used for the cure of the
haemorrhages. When in summer after a long walk, dropsy
is produced by the hasty drinking of stagnant or rain water,
the best remedy is for the patient to drink himself full of
the same water, for that causes increased stool and urine.
17. In epilepsies most of them are curable by the same means
as those by which they were produced.
18. Hellebore given to the sane pours darkness on the mind,
but it is greatly beneficial to the insane.
19. Fever is evidence of coction (maturing process), hence
a beneficial phenomenon (Aph VII/42) and is not to
be suppressed; instead it is to be intensified through
application of hot water.
20. In tetanus where the body is cold and stiff heat is produced
by applying cold water to the affected part.
21. Life is short and the art (of healing) long, opportunity
(to provide healing) is fleeting; experiment is dangerous
and decision difficult. The physician should be ready
not only to do his best to do his duty but also to secure
the confidence of the patient, his attendants and the
surroundings must be conducive to cure. (Aph. I/I).
22. The physicians own freedom of choice and action are
severely restricted, for he is servant of art, He must act
according to rule. He is bound by the art which is itself
patterned on the art of the organism.
“Hippocratic medicine is essentially individualistic”
A. Castiglioni
One cannot understand the nature of the body’s parts without
understanding the nature of the whole organism. Quoted so
also by Plato. To him (Hippocrates) medicine was more an art
than science. Fundamental to this art was his insistence that the
physician develop the skill to apply what he has learnt through
observation & experience.
Hippocrates spoke for the first time of Clinical Observation;
and unity of man and his environment and formulated for the
first time the basis of the metereo-pathology and correction of
the metereological troubles by dietetics;
He spoke of preventive medicine and of hygiene.
The physician should study the patient, not just his illness.
To make a correct diagnosis he must learn everything possible
about the patient’s condition, his daily routine and occupation,
his family background, and the environment in which he lives.

In treating his patients, he should do everything to assist physis
(nature), the great healer, to effect a cure.
His final prognosis should follow from his careful observation.
Essence of Places in man.

Peritopon* that is places in man the last Hippocratic work
was written most probably by Akron of Agrigentum in the 350
B.C. It not only supports but introduces a few more things into
the sayings of Group I & IV writings.
In short, he says—
The organism is a whole, all of whose parts interact and
intercommunicate. The smallest part contains every thing which
is in the largest part.
The physis is the arche (Starting point) of all logos (reasoning)
in medicine and all cure must be directed at this arche.
Cure is through coction (maturation/overpowering) with
crisis and empyema. Hence medicine must be administered at
the correct time neither too soon nor too late.
Cure by similars which had been suggested in Group I & VI
is developed extensively.
Fevers are treated with heating remedies; expectoration
and coughs with medicines which provoke expectoration and
coughing; phlegmatic diseases with liquids.
Treatment by similars is proposed as a general principle;
diseases are caused by similars and by similars which he takes,
* Introduction Organon of Medicine.

the patient is saved, What causes strangury also cures it; coughs
are caused and cured by the same things; fever is dominated by
what produces it and is produced by what dominates it.
Strong medicines are suited to a strong physis and weak
medicines to a weak physis; the treatment must be adjusted to
the physis of the patient,
But similarity lies between the medicine and the physis, and
this means contrariety between medicine and the disease.
Pain is caused by cold in those of warm constitution, by
warmth in those who are dry and by dryness in those who are wet.
These changes occur whenever there is a change and
corruption of the physis. Hence such pains are cured by contraries.
A warm constitution which has become painful through cold
is cured by a warm medicine.
If similars fail contraries should be attempted.
This treatment of the relationship between organism and
environment differs from that proposed by DIOCLES and the
rationalists (Group III writers) and resembles that of Group I.
Medicines cannot be classified as exclusively similar or
contrary, since the same medicine can have opposite effects even
in the same person. This is why medicine is difficult to learn; it
is a matter of degree or measure.
Similarity and contrariety are assimilated to the theory of
coction.
Purgatives are not the contrary of astringents since an
astringent can cause purgation. Thus they can have the same
effect. Purgatives become non-purgatives.
Suppression; if a flux** goes elsewhere, wherever that may

be it will cause a more serious illness; a flux which is blocked,
whether through skin or through the stomach, will cause aches
in the joints etc.
“The parallels with Ancient medicines and the Art as well
as with APHORISMS, Prognosis and Coan Prognosis are
noteworthy”. LITTRE.
It relies ultimately on the empirical postulates together with
Nutriment and Epidemics: it forms a connecting link between
the Group I and IV writings and the empirical doctrines which
emerged a century later in Alexandria in 250 B.C.
T.B. von Hohenheim (P.A. Paracelsus) came (1493-1541) and
brought almost a revolution. He criticised the Galenic medicine,
reestablished Hippocratic/empiric medicine and rejuvenated it
greatly. He stressed the need of giving only one medicine at a
time, as he practised and gave a very small amount of medicine
compared to his predecessors. He explained that ‘vomitus vomitu’
is not enough, i.e. the amount of the medicine required to make
a healthy person vomit is 1000 times stronger than required to
cure a man suffering from vomiting. He first mentioned about
primary and secondary action of drugs; he said ‘bring the disease
from within out and not otherwise’ etc.
He found out many specific similar drugs of metallic origin
and added many more drugs of botanic kingdoms through his
famous Doctrine of Signature. He was contemplating on the idea
that there must be a way by which we may know, from beforehand,
** Secretion / discharge.
all the curative properties of each and every drug to be master of

medicine. He died young at the age of 48 years.
C.F.S Hahnemann (1755-1883) took up, the work of
Paracelsus and completed the system by discovering the
pharmacological experimentation (drug proving on healthy-
human beings). He further improved upon by finding out the
process of potentisation of drugs etc.* Hence each one of us is
and has been, a follower of Hippocrates.
Hippocratic/Empiric medicine though not perfect is complete
in essentials so far as therapeutics is concerned. And each of
its ingredients............is scientific in nature, since it is science-
fostered and science-fostering. Hippocratic medicine, completed
by Hahnemann is, therefore, the medicine of the future and
medicine of the people.
* See Contributions of Hahnemann.

LIMITATIONS OF HOMOEOPATHY
All the basic principles were recognised, introduced and
utilised to make homoeopathy complete and scientific. It remains
still to be perfected in various ways. Among other things our
knowledge about its scope (or limitation, these being only the
two sides of the same coin) is very vague and indefinite still. And
without at least minimum knowledge about it we are likely to
err in mainly two ways. Either we “attempt the impossible and
bring ridicule” on us and the art; or being “ignorant of the higher
possibilities” we “miss the opportunities and bring discredit” upon
us and our art. This has to be appreciated even when we feel that
sharp demarcation of the limitations is very difficult, if not rather
impossible to draw.
Since the list of curable disease-conditions by homeopathy
would be enormous, the exclusion method is generally followed,
that is, to note the conditions where it would not be operative
(applicable). The accepted 5 classical propositions of DAKE,
modified by FINCKE and CLOSE are shown below.
1. Homoeopathy relates primarily to no affection of health
where the exciting cause of disease is constantly present
and operative.
2. It relates primarily to no affections of health, which will,
of themselves, cease after the removal of the exciting cause
by physical, chemical or hygienic measures.
3. It relates primarily to no affections of health occasioned
by injury or destruction of tissues which are incapable of
restoration.
4. It relates primarily to no affections of health where the vital

reactive power of the organism to medicines is exhausted,
obstructed or prevented.
5. It relates to no affection of health, the symptomatic
likeness of which may not be perceptibly produced in the
healthy organism by medical means, nor to affections in
which such are not perceptible.
To (1) Please refer to Sec. 7, where Hahnemann says ‘-manifest
exciting or maintaining cause (Causa occasionalis) has to be
removed before anything. Also—
To (2) Please refer to Sec. 77. Hahnemann says that diseases
incurred due to “avoidable noxious influences (residing in
marshy districts, indulging in injurious liquors or aliments, over
exertion of body or mind etc.-disappear spontaneously—under
an improved mode of living.”
To (3) Please refer to Sec. 186,—“injuries accruing to the body
from without if they be at all severe-the treatment of such diseases
is relegated to surgery” and “affected parts require mechanical
aid”. Also To Sec. 279. where he says—“if the disease-manifestly
depend on a considerable deterioration of an important viscus”
as also “insuperable (irreversible) tissue changes” the condition
will be an incurable one.
To (4) Please refer to the preface to the 5th edition. He
says—“Homoeopathy knows that a cure can only take place by
the reaction of the vital force—and that the cure will be certain
and rapid in proportion to the strength with which the vital force
still prevails in the patient.” Also
To footnote to Sec. 67. He says,
“Only in the most urgent cases-in sudden accidents—as for

example from lightning, from suffocation, freezing, drowning
etc. is it admissible and judicious- to stimulate the irritability and
sensibility—with a palliative.”
To (5) If a case has no parallel (similar) picture in the materia
medica it cannot be treated. And if a subject do not feel any
trouble, despite having serious changes inside, hence do not report
to the physician, e.g. in latent stage of syphilis, the condition
has become incurable. Above propositions, are such as the most
careful and practised prescribers have found most generally valid.
Nonetheless the limitations of Homoeopathy are actually the
limitations of our Knowledge.
“The law of cure as taught by Hahnemann is not and cannot
be limited to a small group of conditions, the limitations rest
entirely with our ignorance.”
H.A. ROBERTS.
PATHOLOGY AND HOMOEOPATHY

Pathology, the science of suffering (Pathos=suffering, logos-
logy = Science) begins from the very first moment, when a person
begins to feel uneasy, diseased. And the physician should not
wait, till the disease condition has become localised and/or, till
the disease condition can be given a definite label, preferably with
the help of some laboratory finding.
It would have been the best, indeed, if the physician could
have prevented the person from falling ill. But if he could not
do it, for whatever reason, he should treat and try to cure the
patient then and there, to nip the disease in bud. And so long as
the disease condition remains in the state of functional disorder,
it is very much easier to cure the suffering. On the other hand,

more the tissue change, more difficult it becomes to cure.
But to treat any one effectively and confidently, i.e. to cure
him rapidly, gently and permanently, “the physician should have
knowledge of disease” before anything, to be a true practitioner
of the healing art, and a preserver of health. Up to date this
knowledge is derived from mainly 2 subjects, viz, practice of
medicine and pathology. It is true, that much knowledge is
acquired from the two subjects, but these mostly neglect, if not
disregard, a few essential elements. These are, to name a few:
(A) The individualistic approach. The physician has to clearly
perceive what is to be cured in disease, that is to say, in
each individual case of disease etc. Again ‘every medicine
exhibits peculiar actions on the human frame, which are
not produced in exactly the same manner by any other
medicinal substance of a different kind etc. In short, we
have to individualise.
(B) The wholistic approach. There is not, perhaps a single local
disease. In the so called local disease, if any, however small
the manifestation might be, the whole man is not only
conscious of it the whole living organism sympathises.
Rather no external malady can arise, persist or grow,
without some internal cause, without the cooperation of
the whole organism.
(C) The Dynamic approach. A living man is essentially a
psyco-somatic being. And he, being the most complex
and most perfected of all the organisation, tries to attend
to all the higher purposes of life with his reason gifted
mind. Far from being a mere collection of some types of
tissues and chemicals and substances, he reacts to the same
stimulus differently if from different source; again reacts

differently to the same stimulus at different time. Due
to the presence of this psychic element Hahnemannian
pathology gives, therefore, equal importance, if not more,
to man’s mental symptoms, far from disregarding them.
Yet the knowledge of disease, acquired from ‘practice of
medicine’ and ‘Pathology’ not only helps us in various ways but
is a necessity for all, for the following reasons.
1. To diagnose: a) for isolating patients suffering from
infectious disease b) for informing the health authorities
in such cases c) for preventing the members of the
patients family in such cases d) for informing the police
and other relevant persons in the case of a suspected
homicide or suicide e) for prognosis and for apprehending
the complications, which may arise, and for taking
precautionary steps against them f ) for giving preventive
medicine to ones not yet affected and g) for selecting
the most similar medicine in each case by differentiating
the disease characterising symptoms from the individual
concomitant symptoms, h) Lastly for differentiating a case
to be transferred to a surgeon from the one which may be
medically treated and cured; or to decide whether a case
may still be treated medicinally may have to be transferred
to a surgeon if no improvement results, and to know the
correct time when to do so.
2. To decide about the nature of diet. The diets of a person
suffering from choleraic and of a person suffering from a
tubercular condition can not be the same. Again cases of
hypoproteinemia and uric acid diathesis can not be given
the same diets. Rather, these will be diametrically opposite
to one another.
3. To decide about the regimen (management). Some require

complete rest, others may be in need of moderate exercise;
some needing a change of place etc.
4. To decide which type of potency is required. The potency
may be very low, medium or high, depending upon the
nature of the disease condition.
5. To evaluate each case from time to time whether the case
is improving or otherwise. Additional help may be had
from Kent’s 12 observations, Hering’s law of cure etc., but
before all Organon of medicine.
6. To understand the meaning of the phrases in materia
medica, repertory etc.
These are not all, yet the salient features of the need of
knowledge of disease for every physician.
SECOND PRESCRIPTION
The first ever and reliable observations are available in Organon
of medicine and theoretical part of ‘Chronic Diseases.—’.
Aegidi, Kent and Elizabeth wright etc. too have dwelt on Second
Prescription, which may also be consulted.
The question of ‘second prescription, arises only after ‘the
first prescription’.
The first prescription is that which has acted, It means the
first ever medicine which has brought some change in the patient,
good or bad.
The prescription (the medicine contained in it), not bringing
any change in the patient, good or bad, is not considered to be
a prescription. It is also known as no prescription. Also, the
prescription containing non medicinal substances e.g. placebo is

also not considered as a prescription.
The second prescription is one of mainly 4 types:
1. Repetition of the same medicine (as in the 1st one)
2. (a) Complementary medicine (completing the action of
the 1st medicine which failed to bring complete
cure), or
(b) One generally an acute type of related medicine,
needed to passify an acute disease condition arising
after the first medicine which was of deep/long acting
nature.
3. Change of plan of treatment (when after the first medicine
a new disease picture appears, of different miasmatic
nature).
4. Antidote to the 1st medicine. (Which was wrong and
requires neutralisation)
The names, of the above 4 different types of second
prescription, have been given according to the relation between
the 1st and 2nd medicines. And the nature of the 2nd medicine
depends upon the type of change brought by the 1st medicine
in the patient.
1. Repetition of the 1st medicine is done when.
(a) Either-after more or less improvement at least one of
the disappeared symptoms reappear or,
(b) after some improvement the action of the medicine
stops seemingly, the condition stands still, even after
waiting for a considerable period.
2. Complementary medicine is generally a deep/long acting

medicine required to complete the action of the previous
medicine. Actually a complementary medicine has 2 types
of activity: I) to complete the unfinished work of the 1st
medicine, and II) to neutralise the bad effects, if any,
of the- 1st medicine. Such medicines are: sulphur after
aconite, calcarea after belladonna, sulphur or sepia after
nux vom. etc. These are not cognates.*
3. Change of plan to treatment becomes necessary when
a different miasmatic picture reappears after the 1st
medicine. If after an antipsoric a gonorrhoeal or syphilitic
manifestation is re-established or vice versa. Hence-in the
second prescription an antisycotic or antisyphilitic drug
is to be given according to the present need.
4. Antidote becomes necessary when after the 1st medicine
either there is severe aggravation endangering the patient’s
condition or the cure begins from the wrong side. For
example: If there be spitting of blood after silica or hepar,
or sulphur etc. the drug is to be immediately atidoted.
Again, if there be involvement of heart after amelioration
of the joint pains the drug is to be antidoted at once.
After Hahnemann many have written on the topic of 2nd
prescription. Notable among them are Aegidi, Kent and Elizabeth
Wright. Of them E. Wright’s notes on this topic are most precise
and practical.
* Since cognates means (co along with/simulataneously, and (gnatus = birth/

born together). These generally do not follow each other well, eg. Ignatia
and Nux vomica. Please also see Drug Relationship.
SURGERY AND HOMOeoPATHY

§ 186
Hahnemann was also a renowned Surgeon.
He too, wanted, like all his Empiric predecessors from
Hippocrates down to Paracelsus, that a therapeutist should
also be a surgeon. “They all felt that it is mostly the failure of
the therapeutist that a surgical condition arises except in the
congenital defects and in the results from trauma. It is therefore
obligatory that the physician who could not cure by internal
medicine, should help by Surgery or mechanical aid, or transfer
the patient to a Surgeon.
Hahnemann has given a few instances, which are absolute
Surgical conditions. These are § 186 “—injury accruing to the
body from without, if it be severe the treatment of such diseases
is relegated to Surgery, —this is right in so far as the affected parts
require mechanical aid, e.g.
(a) by the reduction of dislocations;
(b) by bandages (or needles) to bring together the lips of
wounds;
(c) by mechanical pressure to still the flow of blood from
open arteries;
(d) by the extraction of foreign bodies that have penetrated
into the living parts;
(e) by making an opening into a cavity of the body in order
to remove the irritating substances, or
(f ) to procure the evacuation of effusions or collection of
fluids;
(g) by bringing into apposition the broken extremities if a

fractured bone and
(h) by retaining them in exact contact by an appropriate
bandage” etc.
‘But’ he continues, ‘when in such injuries the whole living
organism requires, as it always does, active dynamic aid to put
it in a position to accomplish the work of healing’ etc. it should
be given.
SURGERY AND HOMOEOPATHY

“Medicine means therapeutics. Therapeutics is the beginning
and end of medicine to which all else is subordinate.”
Paracelsus
There are actually no Surgical diseases; there are and may
be only surgical conditions. At best the congenital defects may
be termed as Surgical diseases. Mostly it is the failure of the
therapeutist that a surgical condition arises except in congenital
defects. Again there is hardly a surgical condition where medicinal
help is not needed either before or after the surgical/mechanical
help.
Surgery is therefore only a supplement and secondary to
medicine.
At best “Surgery may” says James Krauss, “remove or palliate
effects of anatomic excesses, defects, perversions.”
Any surgical condition presents a breach in anatomical
continuity, Accepted conditions, where surgical interference
is inevitable, are enumerated below. Breach in Anatomical
continuity may be of various types, as also from both external

and internal factors.
1. External.
a) From trauma, accident etc. resulting in dislocations,
lacerations, fractures or
b) Burns, either by fire or acid etc.
c) Lodging of foreign substances inside e.g. Safety pins
etc.
2. Internal.
a) Loss of parts e.g. extensive necrosis, threatening
breakage of bone, wasting of nose bridge, perforation
of hollow organs, loss of digital of fingers etc.
b) Unwanted growth i) tumours, warts, polyps,
exostoses, cataract, calculi; ii) Tubal Pregnancy.
c) Intestinal obstruction, intussusception;
d) Ascitis etc.
3. Congenital defects.
(a) (i) Imperforate anus, hymen,
(ii) Cleft palate, harelip
(iii) Patent ductus arteriosus, Foramen ovale etc.
(b) (i) born with six fingers or toes,
(ii) a comparatively smaller pelvis incapable of giving
birth to a baby with a bigger head.
4. Iatrogenic.
For diagnostic purpose-need of biopsy, lumbar puncture,
exploratory openings and the like.
Although officially so accepted, there are many of the above

conditions which are amenable to, and remedied by medicine
alone: e.g. warts, tumours, fistulae, even exostosis, calculi, ascitis
and the like.
It is, therefore, obligatory that the physician must be a surgeon
and the surgeon a physician. Only then the physician will know
exactly when to hand over the case to a surgeon; equally the surgeon
must be able to differentiate the absolute surgical conditions from
the medically curable ones, Only then the therapeutist and the
surgeon may go together to do maximum good to each individual
and may avoid unwanted surgical interference.
“There can be no surgeon who is not a physician. The
physician begets the surgeon, and the surgeon tests the physician”.
Paracelsus
SCALES AND THE NUMERICALS

What does ‘quadrillions part of a medicine’ mean ? Or
sextillion fold potentisation ? Hahnemann has used such terms
all through his Organon of Medicine, Materia Medica Pura and
the Chronic Diseases etc. A few explanatory words would clarify
the apparently unintelligible phrases.
In the centesimal scale of potentising medicines, each
successive potency contains 1/100th part of the medicinal
substances of the previous potency. The second centesimal
potency (2C) contains, for instance, one hundredth part of the
medicinal substance contained in the first potency (1C). After
3 steps of potentisation, therefore, the last potency contains one
millionath part of medicinal substance contained in the original
tincture (1/100 × 1/100 × 1/100 = 1/1000000).
In other words,
1c contains 1/100th part of the mother tincture.
2c ” 1/10000 ’’ ” ” ” ”
3c ” 1/1000000 ’’ ” ” ” ”
The million fold diluted and potentised medicine is denoted
by the sign I. And after further 3 steps of potentisation, that is
at 6c, each drop of it would contain millionth part of medicinal
substance in 3c and billionth part of medicinal substance in
the mother tincture. And this billion fold (million × million)
potentised medicine is designated by the sign II.
In the same way the 9c potency contains the trillionth part of
the original medicinal substance (million × million × million) and
is designated by the sign III. And so on. The table shown below
would explain clearly quite a few phrases mostly used.
3c is millionfold potentisation, denoted as I.

6c ” billionfold ” ” ” II.
9c ” trillionfold ” ” ” III.
12c ” quadrillionfold ” ” ” IV.
15c ” quintillionfold ” ” ” V.
18c ” sextillionfold ” ” ” VI.
21c ” heftillionfold ” ” ” VII.
24c ” Octallionfold ” ” ” VIII.
27c ” Nenillionfold ” ” ” IX and
30c ” Decillionfold ” ” ” X.
Hahnemann also used, as he wrote about, the XX, L and C

potencies which are 60c, 150c, and 300c respectively.
He also used medicines in the decimal scale, it would be
superfluous to add, The medicines prepared in the decimal scale
are designated by a ‘D’ or X after the numerical, for example 5d
or 5x. And the 50 millesimal potencies are shown as 0/1, 0/2 etc.
CHART
0/1 correspond to 5.33c 0/10 correspond to 26.33c
0/2 ” ” 7.66c 0/11 ” ” 8.66c
0/3 “ “ 10c 0/12 ” ” 31c
0/4 ” ” 12.33c 0/13 ” ” 33.33c
0/5 ” ” 14.66c 0/14 ” ” 35.66c
0/6 ” ” 17c 0/15 ” ” 38c
0/7 ” ” 19.33C 0/16 ” ” 40.33c
0/8 ” ” 21.66 0/17 ” ” 42.66
0/9 ” ” 24c 0/18 ” ” 45c
and so on.
DEVELOPMENT OF HOMOEOPATHY IN INDIA

1. Dr. John Martin Honnigberger, was the 1st German
Homoeopathist who had come to India & later treated
Maharaja Ranjit Singh in 1839 ( in Lahore)
2. Dr. C.F. Tonniere, the french homoeopathist practised in
Calcutta from at least 1851 onwards. He proved Acalypha
Indica
3. At the same time - Babu Rajendra Lal Dutta (of Dutta

family - Wellington Sq.) was practising Homoeopathy &
it was he who was instrumental to convert Dr. Mahendra
Lal Sircar. MD. DIL,CIE to Homoeopathy. Babu R. L.
Dutta since converted many allopathic physicians to
Homoeopathy.
4. Dr. M.L. Sircar - 2nd MD of Cal. University had
established apart from Indian Association for the
Cultivation of Science, Calcutta journal of Medicine.
5. Mr. Edward ‘D’ Latour, a puisne judge of the Sadar
Dewani Adalat distributed free Hom, medicine in
Diamond Harbour during Cholera Epidemic.
6. Dr. Cooper & Dr. Rutherford Russel - Govt Medical
officers attached to the Fort William, distributed free
Hom. Medicine. Dr. R. Russel went to England after
retirement & wrote a few monographs, & practised Hom.
openly. He earned name & fame in 1948/49 Cholera
Epidemic.
7. Mr. H. Ryper, a military pensioner stayed at Coolibazar
& treated pts of Cooli bazar & Khidirpur free of cost.
Another Captain. May, also a staff pensioneer lived in
Hastings & was a staunch supporter of Homoeopathy.
He even supplied not only Medicines but also books to
Mr. Ryper over & above every encouragement.
8. Dr. Berigny was the 1st to start Homoeopathic Dispensaries
in Calcutta. He did much for Homoeopathy for quite a
few yrs, till he left Calcutta.
9. Dr. Bihari Lal Bhaduri LMS followed the example of Dr.
M. L. Sarkar. He was converted by the influence of Dr. L.
Salzar. Dr. B.L. Bhaduri’s yeomans job will be remembered

for ever.
10. Dr. L Salzar MD of Vienna had come to Calcutta a few yrs
back. He was a good teacher, author & a good practitioner.
He & Dr. M.L. Sarkar did the most to spread, popularise
& establish Homoeopathy in Calcutta & Bengal.
11. (a) Dr. P.C Majumdar L.M.S. got, his diploma in 1878,
got his M.D. at Chicago, established Calcutta School
of Homoeopathy in 1881.
(b) Dr. B.N. Bannerjee graduated in the same year i.e.
1878 with Dr. P.C. Majumder. B.N. Banerjee settled
at Allahabad. After being converted to Homoeopathy
like Dr. P.C.M was he came to Calcutta & practised
Homoeopathy there. Both were loved by Dr. M.L.
Sarkar. He got his M.D. Homoeopathy from
America.
(c) Dr. M.M. Bose went to America, got his M.D.
from New york Homoeopathic Medical College:
and established M.M.B. College of Calcutta. New
York Hom. Medical School officially recognised this
school.
(d) Many of the Colleagues/Class friends of Dr. P.C.
Majumdar & B.N. Banerjee were converted to
Homoeopathy. Dr. Chandra. S. Kali LMS. A.K.
Dutta, P.N. Chatterjee, A. Banerjee & A. Maitra all
L.M.S. etc. have also written books on Homoeopathy.
(e) Dr. D.N. Roy, Dr. N. Younan all became famous
practitioners of Calcutta, Dr. Hurro Nath Roy LM.S.
practised homoeopathy at Allahabad.
(f ) Cal. Hom. College was established by Dr. C.S. Kali

in 1896.
(g) Dr. A.L. Sarkar (S/o Dr. MLS), Jitendra Nath
Majumdar (S/o Dr. P.C. Majumdar), G.L. Gupta,
J.N. Ghosh, S. K. Bose, P.K. Naug, S.K. Naug, A.N.
Mukherjee & lastly Dr. S.C. Ghosh of Midnapur got
their M.D.s. from America.
12. 1830 — German Geologist of Bengal Dr. Mueler,
Christian missionary distributed Homoeopathic
medicines in Bhowanipur.
1833 — Dr. Honnigberger founded Hom. Medical
to 1860 College and Hospital in Calcutta in the honour
of John Hunter, Deputy Governor, Bengal,
Dr. Tonniere was put in as incharge of the
College.
1846 — Surgeon Brooking established a Homoeop.
to 1947 Hospital at Tanjore and Puddukota
1857 — Dr. Lokenath Maitra was put in charge of
Benares Homoeop Medical College established
in 1857.
1869 — Allahabad Homoeop. Medical College was
established.
1884 — Calcutta Homoeop. Medical College was
established by Dr. Pratap Ch. Majumdar
Since quite a few Homoeop Medical Colleges were established;
Regular Homoeop. Medical College, Bengal Allen Homoeop
Medical College (the Biggest in Asia), Dunham Homoeop.
Medical College etc.
SUPPRESSION
By suppression is meant that a disease manifestation is caused
to disappear before the disease itself is cured” - E. Wright
There are various types of suppression
(A) Psychological
1. Accidental or natural and not due to medication of
any kind; e.g. strong emotions suppressed due to
unnatural exigencies of collective living. These are
more or less conscious suppressions although the
seriousness of their results is not usually known and
the individual takes pride and credit in thrusting
down these emotions.
2. Another suppression is, which comes from great
mental shocks, such as mortification or grief.
(B) Physical
1. In this type, menses are checked by injudicious
bathing or lochia stopped by catching cold or milk
suppressed or perspiration suddenly inhibited by
chilling.
2. Again one disease is suppressed by another. An acute
disease may be held in abeyance by another acute
one, or an acute disease suspending a chronic, until
the acute course is run, etc
(C) Medicinal - External
In regular medicine most frequently local applications
are used in many fields. Coryza and sinus troubles
are suppressed by local applications e.g. by menthol/
camphor inhalers, ointments, drops etc; leucorrhoeal and
gonorrhoeal discharges by injection of mercurochrome,

permanganates etc; acute stages of eruptions of scabies,
herpes etc to chronic ones - psoriasis eczema etc by
Ascabiol, various Sulphur, Zinc, Mercury ointments/
liniments etc; the rashes of exanthemata being driven by
cold applications; other secretions e.g. foot sweat by foot
powder, conjunctivitis by silver salts, ulcers by various
local dressings, and warts by acids or other means. Other
type is local suppression of many conditions by different
lamps, ultra violet Ray therapy etc. Haemorrhages are
suppressed by local astringents such as—Tannic acid or
local coagulants like thromboplastin or X-Ray as also by
medicines like Calcium lactate, gelatin and the like.
(D) Medicinal - internal
Conditions are suppressed by internal medicines, such
as malaria by Quinine in routine massive doses resulting
in recurrent neuralgias; acute rheumatic fever treated by
salicylates leading to suppression of joint symptoms and
inroads of the disease on the heart. Epilepsy and chorea
etc are often driven to cover by saturation with sedatives
and heart disease by Digitalis etc.
(E) Surgical
Diseases are too frequently suppressed by surgery; the
removal of growths, benign or malign; polyp, tonsils,
appendices, varicosities, haemorrhoids, fistulae and bone
hypertrophies such as turbinates, not realising that it
is only removal of ultimates, not curing the disease or
causes and that these end results are benign attempts at
exteriorisation and are only protective localisations.
Most insidious of all are the suppressions by vaccine

injections when a child has to take seven or eight different
kinds in a year.
(F) Suppression of Individual symptoms.
This may be done quite as effectively by the use of
homoeopathic medicines as by old school drugs like
antibiotics and corticosteroids etc, unwantedly as also
saddling the patients with drug results.
“Never forget that to palliate a curable case is suppression”.
E-Wright
KENT’S 12 OBSERVATIONS
Of Prognoses after observing the action of the remedy on
the sick.
Of the 12, the 9th is the observation of the action of the
medicine on healthy human beings (drug proving). There are,
therefore 11 observations only.
1st observation: A prolonged aggravation, and final decline
of the patient.
This means: 1. The medicine may or may not have been a
correct one.
2. but surely the potency was very high,
3. and the medicine was deep acting in nature,
therefore.
4. Instead of helping it has established destruction.
5. since there has been enough irreversible tissue
change.
Lesson: (i) It necessitates immediate antidoting. (ii) After

recase taking a more similar medicine in low
potency is to be given, (iii) Never to use high
potency in chronic and doubtful cases. “Begin
with 12 or 30” M.L. TYLER, specially where tissue-
change may have occurred.
Prognosis: Very bad.
2nd. Observation: Prolonged aggravation then very slow
improvement.
It means: 1. Had the case come a bit later it would also have
fared the same fate as in the 1st observation,
2. The medicine was right.
3. The potency was very high.
4. There has been enough tissue change.
5. The dose would act for a very long period
Lesson: Not to disturb till the action of the dose has worn
off.
Prognosis: Favourable,
3rd Observation: The aggravation is quick, short and strong
with rapid improvement of the patient.
It means 1. the reaction of the economy is vigorous.
2. there is no much tissue change, or very superficial,
if any.
3. the potency was a bit higher.
4. the medicine was most similar one
An aggravation of this kind is very much reassuring
Prognosis: Very Good
4th Observation: Recovery without any aggravation whatsoever.

It means 1. It was the most similar medicine.
2. the potency exactly fitted the case.
3. there was no tissue change whatsoever.
4. the trouble was only a functional disorder.
Lesson: The highest ideal of cure in acute disease condition.
Prognosis: Very Good.
5th Observation: The Amelioration comes first then comes the
aggravation.
It means: 1. The medicine was antipathic in nature, or 2. It
was only partially/superficially similar.
Lesson: a more similar medicine is to be given after re-case
taking.
Prognosis: Bad.
6th Observation: Too short relief of the symptoms.
It means: (A) In acute diseases:
1. the medicine has to be repeated much
oftener, the infection being violent/virulent
in nature, or
2. a more similar medicine is to be found out
and given.
(B) In chronic disease:
1. the medicine was partially similar or,
2. there is a condition which interferes with
the action of the remedy, or
3. structural changes have occurred, or organs

are destroyed or are being destroyed. A very
precarious condition.
Prognosis: Very bad. (in chronic diseases).
7th Observation: A full time amelioration of the symptoms, yet
no special relief of the patient.
It means: There are latent conditions (existing organic
conditions) in such patients that prevent improvement
beyond a certain limit. For example a patient with
one kidney or bigger part of the lungs having been
calcified/fibrosed. Hence the patient is curable only
to a certain limit.
Prognosis: Bad
8th Observation: Some patients prove every remedy they get.
It means: 1. He is inclined to be hypersensitive to all things.
He has an idiosyncrasy to be affected by
everything.
2. He is often incurable.
3. He is to be given lowest, rather crude, potencies
of indicated drug, both in acute and chronic
diseases.
Lesson: 1. He is useful to proving.
2. Never the less such constitutions are improved
by some drugs such as nitric acid etc.
10th Observation: New symptoms appear after the remedy.
It means: 1. The medicine was wrong. And greater the
number of such symptoms is, more wrong the
medicine has been.
Lesson: 1. If the symptoms are of light nature we wait till

the new symptoms pass off.
2. After re-case taking a more similar medicine is
to be given.
3. If the symptoms are of serious nature and
threatening it has to be antidoted.
Prognosis: Bad
11th Observation: Old symptoms are observed to reappear.
It means: 1. The medicine has been very right.
2. More such old symptoms reappear more the
chronic disease is curable:
Lesson: 1. The action of the medicine should not be
disturbed.
2. Only if the reestablished symptom/discharge/
eruption stays for pretty long time the medicine
may be repeated. Here old symptom/diseases
may come and go in the reverse order of their
appearance.
Prognosis: Very good.
12th Observation: Symptoms take the wrong direction, e.g. the
rheumatism of the extremities disappears and the heart
becomes involved.
It means: 1. The medicine has been a wrong one.
Lesson:
It is to be antidoted at once.
A more similar remedy is to be found out and given.
Prognosis: Very bad.
VACCINES AND HOMOEOPATHIC MEDICINES

Originally vaccine means lymph from a cow-pox vesicle. But
it is any substance used for preventive inoculation. A vaccine
therefore, is intended to give immunity against an infection, or
freedom from risk of infection.
Apart from active immunity (which is conveyed by recovery
from infections diseases) and Congenital/Natural immunity
(with which an individual is born) there is the passive immunity,
which is conferred by the introduction of antitoxins or vaccines.
There are not vaccines for all diseases, yet the Triple antigen DPT
(Diphtheria, pertussis and Tetanus), B.C.G (Tuberculosis), polio
(Poliomyelitis), TABC (Typhoid state) and Rabies (Extremely
fatal disease of animals corresponding to Hydrophobia in men)
are given to protect the babies and children from the respective
diseases.
There are medicines too though small in number stimulate
the body mechanism to prepare defensive substances to protect
the individual from possible diseases. Belladonna for scarlet fever,
Baptisia for Typhoid state, Camphor and / or cuprum for choleric
state. Phosphorus for pneumonia are rather well known. Even
Thuja, Variolinum and Antim Tart too helped preventing Small
Pox when and where the vaccine was not available.
Another sphere where homoeopathic medicines have been
giving maximum and faithful service to mankind for 200 years,
is curative one. Even the vaccine for Small Pox (Cow-Pox lymph)
and Typhoid (T.A.B.C) are processes homoeopathic in nature.
INDEX
Page No. Page No.
ab usu in morbis 20 Antipathic Medicine 69
Accessory Circumstances 47 Antipathy 69
Accessory Miasm 196 Antipsoric Drug 198
Accessory Symptom of disease 48 Aphorisms 69
Accessory Symptom of Aphrodisiaca’ 25
Medicine 48 Approaches 70
Accidental Symptom 50 A Priori 12
Accuracy of Homoeopathic Art & Science 73
therapeutics 50 Art. Chr. Disease 73
Action of Homoeo. medicine 53 Art 73
Action of Medicine 54 Artificial Disc. 73
Act of curing 51 Art of Healing 73
Acute Disease 57 Attributes of a Physician 74
Acute Exacerbation 60 Aude Sapere 1
Acute Miasms 61 Aude Sapere 75
Adjuvantia 22 Autenrieth’s salve 25
Aequalia Aequalibus 23 Basic Principle of
Aequalia Aequalibus Curantur 23 homoeopathy 209
Aggravations 62 Basis 25, 208
Aim 65 Basis of Kent’s
Allgemeine Hom. zeitung 66 12 observations 218
Alloeopathy 66 Baths 76
Alloia 25,66 Blood-thirsty Parisian 77
Allopathy 25 Boenninghausen, von 77
Allowable non-homoeopathic Brunnow, von 77
(undynamic) medicines 66 Bulletin des societe Med 77
Alterantia 13, 67 Cardialgia atque alia symptomata78
Alternating Action of medicine 52 Causa morbi 26
Alternating Disease 67 Causa Morborum chronicorum
Amara 68 (non-venereorum) 28
Anamnesis 69 Causa morborum chronicorum 25
Page No. Page No.
Causam Tolle 28 Die Allopathie Art. 89

Causa occasionalis 78 Die Homoeopathie 90
Causa prima 26 Diet & Regimen 91
Cessat Effectus cessat Causa 83 Disease 92
Chart 248 Disease aggravation 62
Chronic Miasms 29 Dissolvents 34
Chronische Krankheiten 83 Diss qua Cor. 90
Clinical Approach 70 Dose, physiological 92
Commentatio de Arthritide tam 85 Dose Homoeopathic 92
Complex Disease 85 Dose Smallest 92
Concomitants 85 Drug Relationship 220
Condition of cure 86 Duce Natura 34, 93
Confortantia 34 Dynamic Action 93
Constitution 87 Dynamic Action of medicine 54,93
Constitutional diagnosis 87 Dynamis 93
Constitutional medicine 87 Easily Comprehensible
Contagium Vivum 196 Principles 93
Contraindications of medicine 88 Eau de Gourme 94
Contraria contrariis 14 Elias Anthropos 38
Contraria Contrariis Curentur 14 Emotional Diseases 94
Corrigentia 34 Environment 95
Curentur & Curantur 16 Epidemic Disease 99
De Combustionibus 88 Epidemicorum 89
De Combustionibus libellus 34 Epidemion 35, 38, 99
De Morborum epidemicorum 89 Essence of Introd 51
Derivations 89 Essence of places in man 231
Derivatives 34 Et. Seq. 100
Description de l’Egypte 89 Etc. 100
Development of Evolution of Organon
Homoeopathy in India 248 of Medicine 225
De viribus Agaricus muscarius 89 Exactis opii viribus 100
Diagnosis 91
262 / THE DICTIONARY OF ORGANON Index / 262
Page No. Page No.
Examples of Involuntary Hufeland’s Remark 111

Hom 35 Ibid 112
Excitantia 38 Idem 39, 112
Exciting Cause 78 Idiosyncrasy 113
False Chronic disease 101 Idiosynkrasia 113
Fixed Miasms 196 III Theil, Zweite Ausgabe 190
Foods & Drinks in Individualisation 116
Homoeopathy 222 Individualistic Approach 72
Force. 102 Institut Chirurg 118
Fox Glove 38, 102 Intermittent Fever 199
Fragmenta De viribus 102 Interpres Clinicus 118
Fundamental Causes 79 Introduction 20.
General Symptoms 196 Isopathy 39
Genesis 38, 103 I Theil, dritte Ausgabe 190
Genius Epidemicus 103 Journal der Arzneikunde 197
Gentle Cure 103 Kai ymeit 39
Gnothi Seauton 38, 104 Kent’s 12 Observations 254
Hahnemann’s Contribution Large Doses required 118
to medicine 105, 219 Law of Causation 119
Hahnemann’s Ideas Potency Law of Nature 120
and Repetition 204
Lege Artis 39, 122
Hahnemann, life of 104
Letet Immensa 123
Hahnemann, writings of 9
Lettres, Supplement a 123
Heilkunde fuer ‘Muetter 105
Libell de Stramomium 123
Health 174
Libellus 89
Henbane 111
Libellus de stramonii 39
Hia ta omoia 38
Life-Principle 123
Holistic Approach 71
Life 123
Homoeopathic Aggravation 62
Limitations of Homoeopathy 235
Homoion Pathos
List of Antipsoric medicines 125
(Homeopathy) 111
Loc. Cit 126
Homoion Pathos 3
Magazin fuer naturkunde 127
Page No. Page No.

Maintaining Cause 80 Neue Heilart der kinderpocken 140
Male fern-root 39, 127 Neueste Annale Heilkunde 141
Mania Phthsis 127 Nihil quicquam (opinor) 141
Manifestations 197 Non Plus Ultra 40, 142
Metastasis 40 Nosode 142
Materia Medica Pura 127 0 Tempora ! 0 Mores ! 143
Materia Peccans 39, 127 Objective Symptoms 143
Medicinal Aggravation 62 Obscure Symptom 143
Medicine 40,128 Obstacles to cure 143
Medicine Electrisitat 128 One, Single, Simple med. 145
Medicinische Annalen 128 One Sided Disease 144
Memoirs de I’Academie 128 Opera 146
Memoirs et observations 128 Opiata dolores augentur 146
Mental Disease 128 Organon 2
Mercurialia 40 Organon de l’ art de guerir 15
Mesmerism 136 Organon of Medicine 3
Metaschematismen 129 Organum 40
M. Lux 23 Palliation 146
Metaschmetismen 40 Pathogenetic Symptom 146
Metastasis 128 Pathognomonic Symptom 146
Miasmata 129 Pathology and Homoeopathy 237
Minimum Dose 134 Per Idem 147
Minister naturae 40 (Per Idem) 113
Mission 135 Peri topon ton kat 40
Modalities 136 Per se 147
Morbific Noxious agent 138 Physiological action of medicine 55
Most Similar Medicine 139 Plethora 15
Nachricht zu Erlangen 140 Posology 147
Natural Disease 140 Potency and Potentisation 150
Nature’s Law of cure 140 Potentisation 152
Nempe Primumaegroto 141 Preventive medicine 154
Nervina 40 PrimaeViae 157
264 / THE DICTIONARY OF ORGANON Index / 264
Page No. Page No.

Primary Action of medicine 55 Secondary Cause 82
Prime Cause 82 Second Prescription 240
Principles 94 Secundum artem 42
Proving of Medicines 157 Short History of
Proximate Cause 82 Homoeopathy 227
Pseudo Chronic disease 163 Sign & Symptom 178
Psora 41,164 Sign 178
Psoraelia 164 Signs of Improvement 178
Psorat 164 Similia Similibus 16
Qualifications of a Physician 168 Similia Similibus Curantur 16
Quidquid in Buccam Venit 195 Similia Similibus Curentur 16
Rapid Cure 168 Si modo Essent 42,177
Reine Arzneimittellehre 168 Simple System 180
Remedy 168 si non Juvat, modo ne 177
Repellents 42 Some of Hippocrates’ sayings 228
Repetition of same Potency 169 Specific Medicine 180
Reprecutients 42 Status Morbi 182
Requisites of a Physician 169 St Yve’s salve 42
Return of original symptom 169 Suppression 183, 252
Roborantia 42,169 Supra 183
Roodvonk 169 Surgery and Homoeopathy 243
S. Hahnemann 5 Surrogates 183
Scales and the Numericals 246 Susceptibility 183
Science 169 Symptom 185
Scientific Conception of 174 Table of Contents 185
Scientific Elements 176 Taking A Case 185
Scientific conception of Taschenbuch Fuer 190
Chronic Miasms 175 The Prefaces / 12
Scientific conception of The Text 47
Individualistic 175 Tissue Change 190
Scientificity of Medicine 169 Totality of Symptoms 190
Secondary Action of medicine 56 To ton Rohon, Stalagma 192
Page No. Page No.
Traite de l’inoculation 192 Vaccines and Homoeopathic

Transformation of Medicines 59
Hahnemann’s ideas 202 Various Editions of Organon 194
Typus 42 Versuch einer Wechsel 195
Ueber den Werth Heilweg 193 Vide 196
Ueberdie Erfahrung 42,193 Vide supra 196
Ueber die Kuhpocken 193 Vis Medicatrix 19
Uebersicht der antipsoric 193 Vis Medicatrix Naturae 19
Unguenta nervine 50 Wholistic approach 174
Usus in Morbis 197
Comprehensive Study of Organon
Dr. G. Nagendra Babu
Distinguishing Features:
zz Detailed account on the history of medicine and history of
development of homoeopathy in India is well elaborated
zz Illustration of comprehensive articles on posology
zz Detailed collection of the writings and contributions of Master
Hahnemann have been included
ISBN: 978-81-319-0767-2 | 568 pp

Principles & Practice of
Homoeopathy
Dr M.L. Dhawale
zz A self-study evolutionary learning system for Principles and
Practice of homoeopathy
zz Unique, masterly, scientific presentation of Hahnemannian
Homoeopathy as evolved by Boenninghausen, Kent, Close,
Boger, Tyler and Roberts.
zz Extensive presentation of repertorisation with Case-
demonstrations.
zz Presentation of standardised Homoeopathic Practice with the
S.C.R. System at the I.C.R.
ISBN: 978-81-319-3133-2 | 736 pp

Organon of the Medical Art by
Dr Samuel Hahnemann
Wenda Brewster O’Reilly
zz Precise and careful preparation of translation and adaptation
of the Organon
zz One of the most precise translation of the sixth edition of
Organon done till date
zz Indispensable source of teachings of Hahnemann which form
the basis of homoeopathy
ISBN: 978-81-319-0922-5 | 432 pp

The Lesser Writings of
Samuel Hahnemann
R.E. Dudgeon
zz This book brings together all of the Hahnemann’s other writings
zz It contains a number of valuable essays including his first
major essay that defined Homeopathy “Essay on new curative
principles for ascertaining the curative power of drugs”
zz Experience the Hahnemann’s genius and genuine philanthropy
in this unique collection of his medical writings
zz Edited by R.E. Dudgeon this collection of essays and letters is
an important and vital testament to Hahnemann’s extraordinary
powers of intellect
ISBN: 978-81-319-0937-9 | 800 pp

Organon of The Art of Healing
C. Wesselhoeft
zz It is a complete yet comprehensive work by the author on the
subject of Organon.
zz A perfectly correct translation of the original text.
zz More use of periods and intricate sentences to yield rising
process to the mind of the readers.
ISBN: 978-81-319-1819-7 | 328 pp

Dictionary of Organon

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Dictionary of Organon

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

THE DICTIONARY

B. Jain Publishers (P) Ltd.

© with the Author

Published by Kuldeep Jain for

Dr. R. R. Joardar has very simply put a benchmark for

watch on the diseases and also to observe the progress of syphilis,

forward his vision. My sincere gratitude to Dr. Joardar to have

This book, the first and second part together, completes a

Preface To The 3rd Edition

By God’s grace and your blessings the 3rd edition is handed

Yet another project on Organon, was the question raised

Aude Sapere: (L) “Dare to know” —P. Schmidt

that truth must first suffer crucifixion, before it can stand

should use for the discovery of the best remedies for

* Please see the Second line of section 54

(The book)—The organon of medicine. Hahnemann’s magnum

new theory of chronic diseases), bears the date of 1829.

His intelligence and integrity attracted the attention of

In 1789 he removed to Leipsic, For 3 years he could

Eulenburg, but the persecution of the Superintendant

the M.D. degree. On the same day (10.8.1829) he

6. An account of the case of Insanity (of Klockenbring)

20. Organon of the rational healing science appeared in

To each edition of Organon Hahnemann wrote a preface. R. E.

(2) Aetiologically (in miasmatic that is microbic or bacterial;

A medicine supposed to bring alteration in (to change) the

it should be treated by the rule of contraria (that is, it

through either leeches or venesections etc. Hahnemann

Curentur & Curantur (L)—

respectively. R. Hughes ‘explains—“The real question is

Similia Similibus Curentur, thereby giving an imperative

The essay, “indication of the Homoeopathic employment

(a) The Basis (base)

I used nothing more than.

4. The Corrigens, that is the corrective or correcting

Hahnemann says again in the foot note to Sec 56, “But

Alloia (gk)—Different, dissimilar.

specific for them, always go on increasing and growing

disease, once it is produced, continues independently of its

The necessary conditions for (secondary causes of ) the

Hahnemann says (in para, 6) “the old school of medicine

By miasm Hahnemann meant infective agent (Sec. 81

potency of a medicinal disease quite similar to it and

Hahnemann gives the following definition in the footnote

eruption of papules or sports, flat, painless smooth, round

disease, ordinary and the condylomatous gonorrhoea, the

regarded as models of treatment, worthy of imitation. But

Examples of involuntary homoeopathic cures in old

Elias anthropos yn homoiopatheis ymin (Gk)*

Idem (L)—tauton (Gk); same, identical.

In place of viewing the disease condition as a state of

been translated as The localities of mankind” by R. Haehl,

Psora, according to Hahnemann, “is a disease,” then

THE ESSENCE OF INTRODUCTION

In the earliest periods of mankind’ the mode of living was

or bleeding piles or haemoptysis or haematemesis was

bodies, a part burnt, blister producing drug or animal

proving drugs in healthy humans) remained unknown.

THE DICTIONARY OF ORGANON

Accessory Circumstances: §§ 5, 94, 208; F.N. to § 81

“All these modifying factors must be observed, considered,

If a medicine be wrong, new symptoms (which are never

man’s health consists chiefly in alternating actions—a kind of